1\input texinfo @c                               -*-Texinfo-*-
2@c  Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3@c UPDATE!!  On future updates--
4@c   (1)   check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5@c         md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6@c   (2)   for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7@c         in config/tc-*.c
8@c   (3)   for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9@c         in config/obj-*.c
10@c   (4)   portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11@c %**start of header
12@setfilename as.info
13@c ---config---
14@macro gcctabopt{body}
15@code{\body\}
16@end macro
17@c defaults, config file may override:
18@set have-stabs
19@c ---
20@c man begin NAME
21@c ---
22@include asconfig.texi
23@include bfdver.texi
24@c ---
25@c man end
26@c ---
27@c common OR combinations of conditions
28@ifset COFF
29@set COFF-ELF
30@end ifset
31@ifset ELF
32@set COFF-ELF
33@end ifset
34@ifset AOUT
35@set aout-bout
36@end ifset
37@ifset ARM/Thumb
38@set ARM
39@end ifset
40@ifset Blackfin
41@set Blackfin
42@end ifset
43@ifset BOUT
44@set aout-bout
45@end ifset
46@ifset H8/300
47@set H8
48@end ifset
49@ifset SH
50@set H8
51@end ifset
52@ifset HPPA
53@set abnormal-separator
54@end ifset
55@c ------------
56@ifset GENERIC
57@settitle Using @value{AS}
58@end ifset
59@ifclear GENERIC
60@settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61@end ifclear
62@setchapternewpage odd
63@c %**end of header
64
65@c @smallbook
66@c @set SMALL
67@c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68@c instructions.  Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69@c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70@c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71@c
72@c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73@c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74@c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75@c break.
76@c
77@c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78@c not well for the default large-page format.  This manual expects that if you
79@c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80@c tables in question.  You can turn on one without the other at your
81@c discretion, of course.
82@ifinfo
83@set SMALL
84@c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85@c might as well show 'em anyways.
86@end ifinfo
87
88@ifnottex
89@dircategory Software development
90@direntry
91* As: (as).                     The GNU assembler.
92* Gas: (as).                    The GNU assembler.
93@end direntry
94@end ifnottex
95
96@finalout
97@syncodeindex ky cp
98
99@copying
100This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102@c man begin COPYRIGHT
103Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
110section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112@c man end
113@end copying
114
115@titlepage
116@title Using @value{AS}
117@subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118@ifclear GENERIC
119@subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120@end ifclear
121@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122@sp 1
123@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124@end ifset
125@sp 1
126@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127@sp 1
128@sp 13
129The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133distracting the boss while they got some work
134done.
135@sp 3
136@author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137@page
138@tex
139{\parskip=0pt
140\hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141\hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142}
143%"boxit" macro for figures:
144%Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145\gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146     \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147#2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148\gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149@end tex
150
151@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157      with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158      Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
159      section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161@end titlepage
162@contents
163
164@ifnottex
165@node Top
166@top Using @value{AS}
167
168This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171@end ifset
172version @value{VERSION}.
173@ifclear GENERIC
174This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176@end ifclear
177
178This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
180section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182@menu
183* Overview::                    Overview
184* Invoking::                    Command-Line Options
185* Syntax::                      Syntax
186* Sections::                    Sections and Relocation
187* Symbols::                     Symbols
188* Expressions::                 Expressions
189* Pseudo Ops::                  Assembler Directives
190@ifset ELF
191* Object Attributes::           Object Attributes
192@end ifset
193* Machine Dependencies::        Machine Dependent Features
194* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
195* Acknowledgements::            Who Did What
196* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
197* AS Index::                    AS Index
198@end menu
199@end ifnottex
200
201@node Overview
202@chapter Overview
203@iftex
204This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205@ifclear GENERIC
206This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208@end ifclear
209@end iftex
210
211@cindex invocation summary
212@cindex option summary
213@cindex summary of options
214Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.  For details,
215see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217@c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219@ignore
220@c man begin SEEALSO
221gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222@c man end
223@end ignore
224
225@c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226@c to be limited to one line for the header.
227@smallexample
228@c man begin SYNOPSIS
229@value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}]  [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249@c
250@c man end
251@c Target dependent options are listed below.  Keep the list sorted.
252@c Add an empty line for separation.
253@c man begin TARGET
254@ifset AARCH64
255
256@emph{Target AArch64 options:}
257   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
258   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
259@end ifset
260@ifset ALPHA
261
262@emph{Target Alpha options:}
263   [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
264   [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
265   [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
266   [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
267   [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
268@end ifset
269@ifset ARC
270
271@emph{Target ARC options:}
272   [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
273   [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
274   [@b{-mcode-density}]
275   [@b{-mrelax}]
276   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
277@end ifset
278@ifset ARM
279
280@emph{Target ARM options:}
281@c Don't document the deprecated options
282   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
283   [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284   [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
285   [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
286   [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
287   [@b{-mthumb}]
288   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
289   [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
290    @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
291   [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
292@end ifset
293@ifset Blackfin
294
295@emph{Target Blackfin options:}
296   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
297   [@b{-mfdpic}]
298   [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
299   [@b{-mnopic}]
300@end ifset
301@ifset CRIS
302
303@emph{Target CRIS options:}
304   [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
305   [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
306   [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
307   [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
308@c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
309@c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
310@end ifset
311@ifset D10V
312
313@emph{Target D10V options:}
314   [@b{-O}]
315@end ifset
316@ifset D30V
317
318@emph{Target D30V options:}
319   [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
320@end ifset
321@ifset EPIPHANY
322
323@emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
324   [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
325@end ifset
326@ifset H8
327
328@emph{Target H8/300 options:}
329   [-h-tick-hex]
330@end ifset
331@ifset HPPA
332@c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
333@end ifset
334@ifset I80386
335
336@emph{Target i386 options:}
337   [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
338   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
339@end ifset
340@ifset I960
341
342@emph{Target i960 options:}
343@c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
344   [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
345    @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
346   [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
347@end ifset
348@ifset IA64
349
350@emph{Target IA-64 options:}
351   [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
352   [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
353   [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
354   [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
355   [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
356   [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
357   [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
358@end ifset
359@ifset IP2K
360
361@emph{Target IP2K options:}
362   [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
363@end ifset
364@ifset M32C
365
366@emph{Target M32C options:}
367   [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
368@end ifset
369@ifset M32R
370
371@emph{Target M32R options:}
372   [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
373   @b{--W[n]p}]
374@end ifset
375@ifset M680X0
376
377@emph{Target M680X0 options:}
378   [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
379@end ifset
380@ifset M68HC11
381
382@emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
383   [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
384   [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
385   [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
386   [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
387   [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
388   [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
389@end ifset
390@ifset MCORE
391
392@emph{Target MCORE options:}
393   [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
394   [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
395@end ifset
396@ifset METAG
397
398@emph{Target Meta options:}
399   [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
400@end ifset
401@ifset MICROBLAZE
402@emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
403@c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
404@end ifset
405@ifset MIPS
406
407@emph{Target MIPS options:}
408   [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
409   [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
410   [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
411   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
412   [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
413   [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
414   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
415   [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
416   [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
417   [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
418   [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
419   [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
420   [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
421   [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
422   [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
423   [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
424   [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
425   [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
426   [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
427   [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
428   [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
429   [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
430   [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
431   [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
432   [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
433   [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
434   [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
435   [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
436   [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
437   [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
438   [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
439   [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
440   [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
441@end ifset
442@ifset MMIX
443
444@emph{Target MMIX options:}
445   [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
446   [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
447   [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
448   [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
449@end ifset
450@ifset NIOSII
451
452@emph{Target Nios II options:}
453   [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
454   [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
455@end ifset
456@ifset NDS32
457
458@emph{Target NDS32 options:}
459    [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
460    [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
461    [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}]  [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
462    [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
463    [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
464    [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
465    [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
466    [@b{-mb2bb}]
467@end ifset
468@ifset PDP11
469
470@emph{Target PDP11 options:}
471   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
472   [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
473   [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
474@end ifset
475@ifset PJ
476
477@emph{Target picoJava options:}
478   [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
479@end ifset
480@ifset PPC
481
482@emph{Target PowerPC options:}
483   [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
484   [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
485    @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
486    @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
487    @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
488    @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
489    @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
490   [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
491   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
492   [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
493   [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
494   [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
495   [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
496@end ifset
497@ifset RL78
498
499@emph{Target RL78 options:}
500   [@b{-mg10}]
501   [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
502@end ifset
503@ifset RX
504
505@emph{Target RX options:}
506   [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
507   [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
508   [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
509   [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
510   [@b{-mpid}]
511   [@b{-mrelax}]
512   [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
513   [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
514@end ifset
515@ifset RISCV
516
517@emph{Target RISC-V options:}
518   [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
519   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
520@end ifset
521@ifset S390
522
523@emph{Target s390 options:}
524   [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
525   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
526   [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
527@end ifset
528@ifset SCORE
529
530@emph{Target SCORE options:}
531   [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
532   [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
533   [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
534   [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
535@end ifset
536@ifset SPARC
537
538@emph{Target SPARC options:}
539@c The order here is important.  See c-sparc.texi.
540   [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
541    @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
542    @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
543    @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
544    @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
545    @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
546   [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
547    @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
548    @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
549    @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
550    @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
551    @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
552    @b{-bump}]
553   [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
554   [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
555@end ifset
556@ifset TIC54X
557
558@emph{Target TIC54X options:}
559 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
560 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
561@end ifset
562@ifset TIC6X
563
564@emph{Target TIC6X options:}
565   [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
566   [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
567   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
568@end ifset
569@ifset TILEGX
570
571@emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
572   [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
573@end ifset
574@ifset TILEPRO
575@c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
576@end ifset
577@ifset VISIUM
578
579@emph{Target Visium options:}
580   [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
581@end ifset
582@ifset XTENSA
583
584@emph{Target Xtensa options:}
585 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
586 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
587 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
588 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
589 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
590 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
591@end ifset
592@ifset Z80
593
594@emph{Target Z80 options:}
595  [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
596  [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
597  [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
598  [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
599  [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
600  [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
601  [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
602@end ifset
603@ifset Z8000
604
605@c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
606@end ifset
607
608@c man end
609@end smallexample
610
611@c man begin OPTIONS
612
613@table @gcctabopt
614@include at-file.texi
615
616@item -a[cdghlmns]
617Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
618
619@table @gcctabopt
620@item -ac
621omit false conditionals
622
623@item -ad
624omit debugging directives
625
626@item -ag
627include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
628
629@item -ah
630include high-level source
631
632@item -al
633include assembly
634
635@item -am
636include macro expansions
637
638@item -an
639omit forms processing
640
641@item -as
642include symbols
643
644@item =file
645set the name of the listing file
646@end table
647
648You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
649listing without forms processing.  The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
650the last one.  By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
651
652@item --alternate
653Begin in alternate macro mode.
654@ifclear man
655@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
656@end ifclear
657
658@item --compress-debug-sections
659Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
660ELF ABI.  The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
661linkers and object file utilities.  Note if compression would make a
662given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
663
664@ifset ELF
665@cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
666@item --compress-debug-sections=none
667@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
668@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
669@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
670These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
671@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
672@option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
673@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
674@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
675@option{--compress-debug-sections}.
676@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
677sections using zlib.  The debug sections are renamed to begin with
678@samp{.zdebug}.  Note if compression would make a given section
679@emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
680
681@end ifset
682
683@item --nocompress-debug-sections
684Do not compress DWARF debug sections.  This is usually the default for all
685targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
686override this.
687
688@item -D
689Ignored.  This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
690other assemblers.
691
692@item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
693When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
694information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
695
696@item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
697Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
698@var{value} must be an integer constant.  As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
699indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
700value.  The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
701use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
702
703@item -f
704``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
705compiler output).
706
707@item -g
708@itemx --gen-debug
709Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
710debug format is preferred by the target.  This currently means either STABS,
711ECOFF or DWARF2.
712
713@item --gstabs
714Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line.  This
715may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
716
717@item --gstabs+
718Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
719extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
720debuggers crash or refuse to read your program.  This
721may help debugging assembler code.  Currently the only GNU extension is
722the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
723
724@item --gdwarf-2
725Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line.  This
726may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.  Note---this
727option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
728
729@item --gdwarf-sections
730Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
731.debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
732corresponding code section.  For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
733will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
734@var{.debug_line.text.func}.  If the code section is just called @var{.text}
735then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
736suffix.
737
738@ifset ELF
739@item --size-check=error
740@itemx --size-check=warning
741Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
742
743@item --elf-stt-common=no
744@itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
745These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
746symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type.  The default can be controlled
747by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
748@end ifset
749
750@item --help
751Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
752
753@item --target-help
754Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
755
756@item -I @var{dir}
757Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
758
759@item -J
760Don't warn about signed overflow.
761
762@item -K
763@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
764This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
765@end ifclear
766@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
767Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
768@end ifset
769
770@item -L
771@itemx --keep-locals
772Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols.  These symbols start with
773system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
774or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
775@ifclear man
776@xref{Symbol Names}.
777@end ifclear
778
779@item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
780Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
781listing to @var{number}.
782
783@item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
784Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
785lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
786
787@item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
788Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
789@var{number} bytes.
790
791@item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
792Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
793to @var{number} + 1.
794
795@item --no-pad-sections
796Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
797of that section.  The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
798which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
799
800@item -o @var{objfile}
801Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
802
803@item -R
804Fold the data section into the text section.
805
806@item --hash-size=@var{number}
807Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
808@var{number}.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
809assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
810memory requirements.  Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
811requirements at the expense of speed.
812
813@item --reduce-memory-overheads
814This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
815assembly processes slower.  Currently this switch is a synonym for
816@samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
817
818@ifset ELF
819@item --sectname-subst
820Honor substitution sequences in section names.
821@ifclear man
822@xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
823@end ifclear
824@end ifset
825
826@item --statistics
827Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
828assembly.
829
830@item --strip-local-absolute
831Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
832
833@item -v
834@itemx -version
835Print the @command{as} version.
836
837@item --version
838Print the @command{as} version and exit.
839
840@item -W
841@itemx --no-warn
842Suppress warning messages.
843
844@item --fatal-warnings
845Treat warnings as errors.
846
847@item --warn
848Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
849
850@item -w
851Ignored.
852
853@item -x
854Ignored.
855
856@item -Z
857Generate an object file even after errors.
858
859@item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
860Standard input, or source files to assemble.
861
862@end table
863@c man end
864
865@ifset AARCH64
866
867@ifclear man
868@xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
869for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
870@end ifclear
871
872@ifset man
873@c man begin OPTIONS
874The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
87564-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
876@c man end
877@c man begin INCLUDE
878@include c-aarch64.texi
879@c ended inside the included file
880@end ifset
881
882@end ifset
883
884@ifset ALPHA
885
886@ifclear man
887@xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
888for an Alpha processor.
889@end ifclear
890
891@ifset man
892@c man begin OPTIONS
893The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
894processor.
895@c man end
896@c man begin INCLUDE
897@include c-alpha.texi
898@c ended inside the included file
899@end ifset
900
901@end ifset
902
903@c man begin OPTIONS
904@ifset ARC
905The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
906processor.
907
908@table @gcctabopt
909@item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
910This option selects the core processor variant.
911@item -EB | -EL
912Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
913@item -mcode-density
914Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
915@end table
916@end ifset
917
918@ifset ARM
919The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
920processor family.
921
922@table @gcctabopt
923@item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
924Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
925@item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
926Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
927@item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
928Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
929@item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
930Select which floating point ABI is in use.
931@item -mthumb
932Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
933@item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
934Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
935@item -EB | -EL
936Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
937@item -mthumb-interwork
938Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
939ARM code in mind.
940@item -mccs
941Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
942@item -k
943Specify that PIC code has been generated.
944@end table
945@end ifset
946@c man end
947
948@ifset Blackfin
949
950@ifclear man
951@xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
952configured for the Blackfin processor family.
953@end ifclear
954
955@ifset man
956@c man begin OPTIONS
957The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
958the Blackfin processor family.
959@c man end
960@c man begin INCLUDE
961@include c-bfin.texi
962@c ended inside the included file
963@end ifset
964
965@end ifset
966
967@c man begin OPTIONS
968@ifset CRIS
969See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
970@end ifset
971
972@ifset D10V
973The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
974a D10V processor.
975@table @gcctabopt
976@cindex D10V optimization
977@cindex optimization, D10V
978@item -O
979Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
980@end table
981@end ifset
982
983@ifset D30V
984The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
985processor.
986@table @gcctabopt
987@cindex D30V optimization
988@cindex optimization, D30V
989@item -O
990Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
991
992@cindex D30V nops
993@item -n
994Warn when nops are generated.
995
996@cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
997@item -N
998Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
999@end table
1000@end ifset
1001@c man end
1002
1003@ifset EPIPHANY
1004The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1005Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1006
1007@ifclear man
1008@xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1009configured for an Epiphany processor.
1010@end ifclear
1011
1012@ifset man
1013@c man begin OPTIONS
1014The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1015an Epiphany processor.
1016@c man end
1017@c man begin INCLUDE
1018@include c-epiphany.texi
1019@c ended inside the included file
1020@end ifset
1021
1022@end ifset
1023
1024@ifset H8300
1025
1026@ifclear man
1027@xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1028for an H8/300 processor.
1029@end ifclear
1030
1031@ifset man
1032@c man begin OPTIONS
1033The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1034processor.
1035@c man end
1036@c man begin INCLUDE
1037@include c-h8300.texi
1038@c ended inside the included file
1039@end ifset
1040
1041@end ifset
1042
1043@ifset I80386
1044
1045@ifclear man
1046@xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1047configured for an i386 processor.
1048@end ifclear
1049
1050@ifset man
1051@c man begin OPTIONS
1052The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1053an i386 processor.
1054@c man end
1055@c man begin INCLUDE
1056@include c-i386.texi
1057@c ended inside the included file
1058@end ifset
1059
1060@end ifset
1061
1062@c man begin OPTIONS
1063@ifset I960
1064The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1065Intel 80960 processor.
1066
1067@table @gcctabopt
1068@item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1069Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1070
1071@item -b
1072Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1073
1074@item -no-relax
1075Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1076error if necessary.
1077
1078@end table
1079@end ifset
1080
1081@ifset IP2K
1082The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1083Ubicom IP2K series.
1084
1085@table @gcctabopt
1086
1087@item -mip2022ext
1088Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1089
1090@item -mip2022
1091Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1092just the basic IP2022 ones.
1093
1094@end table
1095@end ifset
1096
1097@ifset M32C
1098The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1099Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1100
1101@table @gcctabopt
1102
1103@item -m32c
1104Assemble M32C instructions.
1105
1106@item -m16c
1107Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1108
1109@item -relax
1110Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1111
1112@item -h-tick-hex
1113Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1114
1115@end table
1116@end ifset
1117
1118@ifset M32R
1119The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1120Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1121
1122@table @gcctabopt
1123
1124@item --m32rx
1125Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target.  The default
1126is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1127
1128@item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1129Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1130encountered.
1131
1132@item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1133Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1134encountered.
1135
1136@end table
1137@end ifset
1138
1139@ifset M680X0
1140The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1141Motorola 68000 series.
1142
1143@table @gcctabopt
1144
1145@item -l
1146Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1147
1148@item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1149@itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1150@itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1151Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target.  The default
1152is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1153
1154@item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1155The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1156The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32.  Although
1157the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1158two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1159coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1160
1161@item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1162The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1163unit coprocessor.  The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1164
1165@end table
1166@end ifset
1167
1168@ifset NIOSII
1169
1170@ifclear man
1171@xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1172for an Altera Nios II processor.
1173@end ifclear
1174
1175@ifset man
1176@c man begin OPTIONS
1177The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1178Altera Nios II processor.
1179@c man end
1180@c man begin INCLUDE
1181@include c-nios2.texi
1182@c ended inside the included file
1183@end ifset
1184@end ifset
1185
1186@ifset PDP11
1187
1188For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1189see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1190
1191@table @gcctabopt
1192@item -mpic | -mno-pic
1193Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code.  The
1194default is @option{-mpic}.
1195
1196@item -mall
1197@itemx -mall-extensions
1198Enable all instruction set extensions.  This is the default.
1199
1200@item -mno-extensions
1201Disable all instruction set extensions.
1202
1203@item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1204Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1205
1206@item -m@var{cpu}
1207Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1208disable all other extensions.
1209
1210@item -m@var{machine}
1211Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1212model, and disable all other extensions.
1213@end table
1214
1215@end ifset
1216
1217@ifset PJ
1218The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1219a picoJava processor.
1220
1221@table @gcctabopt
1222
1223@cindex PJ endianness
1224@cindex endianness, PJ
1225@cindex big endian output, PJ
1226@item -mb
1227Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1228
1229@cindex little endian output, PJ
1230@item -ml
1231Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1232
1233@end table
1234@end ifset
1235
1236@ifset M68HC11
1237The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1238Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1239
1240@table @gcctabopt
1241
1242@item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1243Specify what processor is the target.  The default is
1244defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1245
1246@item --xgate-ramoffset
1247Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1248XGATE address space.
1249
1250@item -mshort
1251Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1252
1253@item -mlong
1254Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1255
1256@item -mshort-double
1257Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1258
1259@item -mlong-double
1260Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1261
1262@item --force-long-branches
1263Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1264conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1265sub routine.
1266
1267@item -S | --short-branches
1268Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1269when the offset is out of range.
1270
1271@item --strict-direct-mode
1272Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1273when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1274
1275@item --print-insn-syntax
1276Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1277
1278@item --print-opcodes
1279Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1280
1281@item --generate-example
1282Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1283This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1284
1285@end table
1286@end ifset
1287
1288@ifset SPARC
1289The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1290for the SPARC architecture:
1291
1292@table @gcctabopt
1293@item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1294@itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1295Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1296
1297@samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1298@samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1299
1300@samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1301UltraSPARC extensions.
1302
1303@item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1304For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
1305equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1306
1307@item -bump
1308Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1309@end table
1310@end ifset
1311
1312@ifset TIC54X
1313The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1314architecture.
1315
1316@table @gcctabopt
1317@item -mfar-mode
1318Enable extended addressing mode.  All addresses and relocations will assume
1319extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1320@item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1321Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1322@item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1323Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1324behaviour in the shell.
1325@end table
1326@end ifset
1327
1328@ifset MIPS
1329The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1330a MIPS processor.
1331
1332@table @gcctabopt
1333@item -G @var{num}
1334This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1335implicitly with the @code{gp} register.  It is only accepted for targets that
1336use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix.  The default value is 8.
1337
1338@cindex MIPS endianness
1339@cindex endianness, MIPS
1340@cindex big endian output, MIPS
1341@item -EB
1342Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1343
1344@cindex little endian output, MIPS
1345@item -EL
1346Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1347
1348@cindex MIPS ISA
1349@item -mips1
1350@itemx -mips2
1351@itemx -mips3
1352@itemx -mips4
1353@itemx -mips5
1354@itemx -mips32
1355@itemx -mips32r2
1356@itemx -mips32r3
1357@itemx -mips32r5
1358@itemx -mips32r6
1359@itemx -mips64
1360@itemx -mips64r2
1361@itemx -mips64r3
1362@itemx -mips64r5
1363@itemx -mips64r6
1364Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1365@samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1366alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1367@samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1368@samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1369@samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1370@samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1371MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1372Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1373MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1374
1375@item -march=@var{cpu}
1376Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1377
1378@item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1379Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1380
1381@item -mfix7000
1382@itemx -mno-fix7000
1383Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1384of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1385
1386@item -mfix-rm7000
1387@itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1388Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1389followed by a load instruction.
1390
1391@item -mdebug
1392@itemx -no-mdebug
1393Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1394section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1395
1396@item -mpdr
1397@itemx -mno-pdr
1398Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1399
1400@item -mgp32
1401@itemx -mfp32
1402The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1403flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1404all times.  @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1405and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1406
1407@item -mgp64
1408@itemx -mfp64
1409The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1410flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1411all times.  @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1412and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1413
1414@item -mfpxx
1415The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1416this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1417which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
141832 or 64 bits wide.
1419
1420@item -modd-spreg
1421@itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1422Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1423registers when supported by the ISA.  @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1424@samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1425
1426@item -mips16
1427@itemx -no-mips16
1428Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to putting
1429@code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-no-mips16}
1430turns off this option.
1431
1432@item -mmicromips
1433@itemx -mno-micromips
1434Generate code for the microMIPS processor.  This is equivalent to putting
1435@code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-mno-micromips}
1436turns off this option.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1437at the start of the assembly file.
1438
1439@item -msmartmips
1440@itemx -mno-smartmips
1441Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1442equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1443@samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1444
1445@item -mips3d
1446@itemx -no-mips3d
1447Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1448This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1449@samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1450
1451@item -mdmx
1452@itemx -no-mdmx
1453Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1454This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1455@samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1456
1457@item -mdsp
1458@itemx -mno-dsp
1459Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1460This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1461@samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1462
1463@item -mdspr2
1464@itemx -mno-dspr2
1465Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1466This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1467This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1468@samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1469
1470@item -mdspr3
1471@itemx -mno-dspr3
1472Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1473This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1474This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1475@samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1476
1477@item -mmsa
1478@itemx -mno-msa
1479Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1480This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1481@samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1482
1483@item -mxpa
1484@itemx -mno-xpa
1485Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1486This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1487@samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1488
1489@item -mmt
1490@itemx -mno-mt
1491Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1492This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1493@samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1494
1495@item -mmcu
1496@itemx -mno-mcu
1497Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1498This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1499@samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1500
1501@item -minsn32
1502@itemx -mno-insn32
1503Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1504microMIPS processor.  This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1505instructions.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1506the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1507option.  This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1508start of the assembly file.  By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1509selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1510
1511@item --construct-floats
1512@itemx --no-construct-floats
1513The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1514double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1515value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1516the double width register.  By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1517selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1518
1519@item --relax-branch
1520@itemx --no-relax-branch
1521The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1522branches.  By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1523out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1524
1525@item -mignore-branch-isa
1526@itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1527Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes.  The
1528semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1529most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1530same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label.  Therefore GAS has
1531checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1532modes match.  @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks.  By
1533default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1534branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1535
1536@item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1537Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1538(@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format.  The latter is the default.
1539
1540@cindex emulation
1541@item --emulation=@var{name}
1542This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1543on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both.  MIPS ECOFF support was
1544removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1545It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1546
1547The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1548@samp{mipsbelf}.  Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1549is always ELF.  @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1550big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1551preferred options instead.
1552
1553@item -nocpp
1554@command{@value{AS}} ignores this option.  It is accepted for compatibility with
1555the native tools.
1556
1557@item --trap
1558@itemx --no-trap
1559@itemx --break
1560@itemx --no-break
1561Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1562@samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1563(and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1564@samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1565break exception.
1566
1567@item -n
1568When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1569time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1570@end table
1571@end ifset
1572
1573@ifset MCORE
1574The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1575an MCore processor.
1576
1577@table @gcctabopt
1578@item -jsri2bsr
1579@itemx -nojsri2bsr
1580Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation.  By default this is enabled.
1581The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1582
1583@item -sifilter
1584@itemx -nosifilter
1585Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour.  By default this is disabled.
1586The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1587
1588@item -relax
1589Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1590
1591@item -mcpu=[210|340]
1592Select the cpu type on the target hardware.  This controls which instructions
1593can be assembled.
1594
1595@item -EB
1596Assemble for a big endian target.
1597
1598@item -EL
1599Assemble for a little endian target.
1600
1601@end table
1602@end ifset
1603@c man end
1604
1605@ifset METAG
1606
1607@ifclear man
1608@xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1609for a Meta processor.
1610@end ifclear
1611
1612@ifset man
1613@c man begin OPTIONS
1614The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1615Meta processor.
1616@c man end
1617@c man begin INCLUDE
1618@include c-metag.texi
1619@c ended inside the included file
1620@end ifset
1621
1622@end ifset
1623
1624@c man begin OPTIONS
1625@ifset MMIX
1626See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1627@end ifset
1628
1629@ifset NDS32
1630
1631@ifclear man
1632@xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1633for a NDS32 processor.
1634@end ifclear
1635@c ended inside the included file
1636@end ifset
1637
1638@ifset man
1639@c man begin OPTIONS
1640The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1641NDS32 processor.
1642@c man end
1643@c man begin INCLUDE
1644@include c-nds32.texi
1645@c ended inside the included file
1646@end ifset
1647
1648@c man end
1649@ifset PPC
1650
1651@ifclear man
1652@xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1653for a PowerPC processor.
1654@end ifclear
1655
1656@ifset man
1657@c man begin OPTIONS
1658The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1659PowerPC processor.
1660@c man end
1661@c man begin INCLUDE
1662@include c-ppc.texi
1663@c ended inside the included file
1664@end ifset
1665
1666@end ifset
1667
1668@ifset RISCV
1669
1670@ifclear man
1671@xref{RISC-V-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1672for a RISC-V processor.
1673@end ifclear
1674
1675@ifset man
1676@c man begin OPTIONS
1677The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1678RISC-V  processor.
1679@c man end
1680@c man begin INCLUDE
1681@include c-riscv.texi
1682@c ended inside the included file
1683@end ifset
1684
1685@end ifset
1686
1687@c man begin OPTIONS
1688@ifset RX
1689See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1690@end ifset
1691
1692@ifset S390
1693The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1694processor family.
1695
1696@table @gcctabopt
1697@item -m31
1698@itemx -m64
1699Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1700@item -mesa
1701@item -mzarch
1702Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1703Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1704@item -march=@var{processor}
1705Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1706@samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1707@samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1708@samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1709@samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), or @samp{arch12}.
1710@item -mregnames
1711@itemx -mno-regnames
1712Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1713@item -mwarn-areg-zero
1714Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1715but evaluates to zero.
1716@end table
1717@end ifset
1718@c man end
1719
1720@ifset TIC6X
1721
1722@ifclear man
1723@xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1724for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1725@end ifclear
1726
1727@ifset man
1728@c man begin OPTIONS
1729The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1730TMS320C6000 processor.
1731@c man end
1732@c man begin INCLUDE
1733@include c-tic6x.texi
1734@c ended inside the included file
1735@end ifset
1736
1737@end ifset
1738
1739@ifset TILEGX
1740
1741@ifclear man
1742@xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1743for a TILE-Gx processor.
1744@end ifclear
1745
1746@ifset man
1747@c man begin OPTIONS
1748The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1749processor.
1750@c man end
1751@c man begin INCLUDE
1752@include c-tilegx.texi
1753@c ended inside the included file
1754@end ifset
1755
1756@end ifset
1757
1758@ifset VISIUM
1759
1760@ifclear man
1761@xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1762for a Visium processor.
1763@end ifclear
1764
1765@ifset man
1766@c man begin OPTIONS
1767The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1768processor.
1769@c man end
1770@c man begin INCLUDE
1771@include c-visium.texi
1772@c ended inside the included file
1773@end ifset
1774
1775@end ifset
1776
1777@ifset XTENSA
1778
1779@ifclear man
1780@xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1781for an Xtensa processor.
1782@end ifclear
1783
1784@ifset man
1785@c man begin OPTIONS
1786The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1787Xtensa processor.
1788@c man end
1789@c man begin INCLUDE
1790@include c-xtensa.texi
1791@c ended inside the included file
1792@end ifset
1793
1794@end ifset
1795
1796@c man begin OPTIONS
1797
1798@ifset Z80
1799The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1800a Z80 family processor.
1801@table @gcctabopt
1802@item -z80
1803Assemble for Z80 processor.
1804@item -r800
1805Assemble for R800 processor.
1806@item  -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1807@itemx -Wnud
1808Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1809@item  -ignore-unportable-instructions
1810@itemx -Wnup
1811Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1812@item  -warn-undocumented-instructions
1813@itemx -Wud
1814Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1815@item  -warn-unportable-instructions
1816@itemx -Wup
1817Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1818@item  -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1819@itemx -Fud
1820Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1821@item  -forbid-unportable-instructions
1822@itemx -Fup
1823Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1824@end table
1825@end ifset
1826
1827@c man end
1828
1829@menu
1830* Manual::                      Structure of this Manual
1831* GNU Assembler::               The GNU Assembler
1832* Object Formats::              Object File Formats
1833* Command Line::                Command Line
1834* Input Files::                 Input Files
1835* Object::                      Output (Object) File
1836* Errors::                      Error and Warning Messages
1837@end menu
1838
1839@node Manual
1840@section Structure of this Manual
1841
1842@cindex manual, structure and purpose
1843This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1844@sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}.  We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1845notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1846@command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1847
1848@ifclear GENERIC
1849We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1850configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1851@end ifclear
1852@ifset GENERIC
1853This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1854various flavors of the assembler.
1855@end ifset
1856
1857@cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1858On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1859to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1860In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1861architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1862mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1863particular architecture.
1864@ifset GENERIC
1865You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1866machine architecture manual for this information.
1867@end ifset
1868@ifclear GENERIC
1869@ifset H8/300
1870For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1871Series Programming Manual}.  For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1872Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1873@end ifset
1874@ifset SH
1875For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1876see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1877@cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1878@cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1879@end ifset
1880@ifset Z8000
1881For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1882@end ifset
1883@end ifclear
1884
1885@c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1886@ignore
1887Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1888the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1889Foundation, Inc.}.  This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1890computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1891once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1892qualification.
1893
1894@command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1895human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1896computer-readable series of instructions.  Different versions of
1897@command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1898@end ignore
1899
1900@c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1901@c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long".  Defining "word" to any
1902@c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1903@c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1904@c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1905@c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1906@c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1907@c directives).
1908
1909@node GNU Assembler
1910@section The GNU Assembler
1911
1912@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1913
1914@sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1915@ifclear GENERIC
1916This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1917configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1918@end ifclear
1919If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1920should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1921architecture.  Each version has much in common with the others,
1922including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1923@dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1924
1925@cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1926@command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1927@sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1928@code{@value{LD}}.  Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1929assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1930machine would assemble.
1931@ifset VAX
1932Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1933@end ifset
1934@ifset M680X0
1935@c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1936@c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1937This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1938assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1939incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1940@end ifset
1941
1942@c man end
1943
1944Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1945program in one pass of the source file.  This has a subtle impact on the
1946@kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1947
1948@node Object Formats
1949@section Object File Formats
1950
1951@cindex object file format
1952The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1953object file formats.  For the most part, this does not affect how you
1954write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1955are typically different in different file formats.  @xref{Symbol
1956Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1957@ifclear GENERIC
1958@ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1959For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1960@value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1961@end ifclear
1962@c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1963@ifset I960
1964On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1965@code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1966@end ifset
1967@ifset HPPA
1968On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1969SOM or ELF format object files.
1970@end ifset
1971@end ifclear
1972
1973@node Command Line
1974@section Command Line
1975
1976@cindex command line conventions
1977
1978After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1979options and file names.  Options may appear in any order, and may be
1980before, after, or between file names.  The order of file names is
1981significant.
1982
1983@cindex standard input, as input file
1984@kindex --
1985@file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1986explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1987
1988@cindex options, command line
1989Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1990hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option.  Each option changes the behavior of
1991@command{@value{AS}}.  No option changes the way another option works.  An
1992option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1993the letter is important.   All options are optional.
1994
1995Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them.  The file
1996name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1997with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1998standard).  These two command lines are equivalent:
1999
2000@smallexample
2001@value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2002@value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2003@end smallexample
2004
2005@node Input Files
2006@section Input Files
2007
2008@cindex input
2009@cindex source program
2010@cindex files, input
2011We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2012describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}.  The program may
2013be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2014doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2015
2016@c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2017@c APL training...   doc@cygnus.com
2018The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2019order specified.
2020
2021@c man begin DESCRIPTION
2022Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2023program.  The source program is made up of one or more files.
2024(The standard input is also a file.)
2025
2026You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2027names.  The input files are read (from left file name to right).  A
2028command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2029is taken to be an input file name.
2030
2031If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2032from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal.  You
2033may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2034to assemble.
2035
2036Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2037in your command line.
2038
2039If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2040file.
2041
2042@c man end
2043
2044@subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2045
2046@cindex input file linenumbers
2047@cindex line numbers, in input files
2048There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2049either may be used in reporting error messages.  One way refers to a line
2050number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2051``logical'' file.  @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2052
2053@dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2054to @command{@value{AS}}.
2055
2056@dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2057directives; they bear no relation to physical files.  Logical file names help
2058error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2059is itself synthesized from other files.  @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2060@samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor.  See also
2061@ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2062
2063@node Object
2064@section Output (Object) File
2065
2066@cindex object file
2067@cindex output file
2068@kindex a.out
2069@kindex .o
2070Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2071your assembly language program translated into numbers.  This file
2072is the object file.  Its default name is
2073@ifclear BOUT
2074@code{a.out}.
2075@end ifclear
2076@ifset BOUT
2077@ifset GENERIC
2078@code{a.out}, or
2079@end ifset
2080@code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2081@end ifset
2082You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option.  Conventionally,
2083object file names end with @file{.o}.  The default name is used for historical
2084reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2085directly into a runnable program.  (For some formats, this isn't currently
2086possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2087
2088@cindex linker
2089@kindex ld
2090The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}.  It contains
2091assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2092the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2093information for the debugger.
2094
2095@c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2096@c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2097
2098@node Errors
2099@section Error and Warning Messages
2100
2101@c man begin DESCRIPTION
2102
2103@cindex error messages
2104@cindex warning messages
2105@cindex messages from assembler
2106@command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2107file (usually your terminal).  This should not happen when  a compiler
2108runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically.  Warnings report an assumption made so
2109that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2110grave problem that stops the assembly.
2111
2112@c man end
2113
2114@cindex format of warning messages
2115Warning messages have the format
2116
2117@smallexample
2118file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2119@end smallexample
2120
2121@noindent
2122@cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2123(where @b{NNN} is a line number).  If both a logical file name
2124(@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2125@ifset GENERIC
2126(@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2127@end ifset
2128have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2129in the current assembler source file will be used.  The message text is
2130intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2131
2132Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2133directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive.  For example:
2134
2135@smallexample
2136  .file 2 "bar.c"
2137     error_assembler_source
2138  .file "foo.c"
2139  .line 30
2140      error_c_source
2141@end smallexample
2142
2143produces this output:
2144
2145@smallexample
2146  Assembler messages:
2147  asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2148  foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2149@end smallexample
2150
2151@cindex format of error messages
2152Error messages have the format
2153
2154@smallexample
2155file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2156@end smallexample
2157
2158The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2159messages.  The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2160because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2161
2162@node Invoking
2163@chapter Command-Line Options
2164
2165@cindex options, all versions of assembler
2166This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2167versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2168for options specific
2169@ifclear GENERIC
2170to the @value{TARGET} target.
2171@end ifclear
2172@ifset GENERIC
2173to particular machine architectures.
2174@end ifset
2175
2176@c man begin DESCRIPTION
2177
2178If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2179you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2180The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2181by commas.  For example:
2182
2183@smallexample
2184gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2185@end smallexample
2186
2187@noindent
2188This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2189standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2190local symbols in the symbol table).
2191
2192Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2193command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2194(You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2195precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2196assembler.)
2197
2198@c man end
2199
2200@menu
2201* a::             -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2202* alternate::     --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2203* D::             -D for compatibility
2204* f::             -f to work faster
2205* I::             -I for .include search path
2206@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2207* K::             -K for compatibility
2208@end ifclear
2209@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2210* K::             -K for difference tables
2211@end ifset
2212
2213* L::             -L to retain local symbols
2214* listing::       --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2215* M::		  -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2216* MD::            --MD for dependency tracking
2217* no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2218* o::             -o to name the object file
2219* R::             -R to join data and text sections
2220* statistics::    --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2221* traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2222* v::             -v to announce version
2223* W::             -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2224* Z::             -Z to make object file even after errors
2225@end menu
2226
2227@node a
2228@section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2229
2230@kindex -a
2231@kindex -ac
2232@kindex -ad
2233@kindex -ag
2234@kindex -ah
2235@kindex -al
2236@kindex -an
2237@kindex -as
2238@cindex listings, enabling
2239@cindex assembly listings, enabling
2240
2241These options enable listing output from the assembler.  By itself,
2242@samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2243You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2244@samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2245@samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2246@samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2247High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2248@samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2249also.
2250
2251Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2252information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2253
2254Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing.  Any lines
2255which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2256other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2257omitted from the listing.
2258
2259Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2260listing.
2261
2262Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2263listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2264@code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2265@code{.sbttl}.
2266The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2267If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2268listing-control directives have no effect.
2269
2270The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2271@emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2272
2273Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2274because it
2275is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2276is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2277directives.  This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2278stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler.  This reduces
2279memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2280
2281@node alternate
2282@section @option{--alternate}
2283
2284@kindex --alternate
2285Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2286
2287@node D
2288@section @option{-D}
2289
2290@kindex -D
2291This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2292likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2293@command{@value{AS}}.
2294
2295@node f
2296@section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2297
2298@kindex -f
2299@cindex trusted compiler
2300@cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2301@samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2302(trusted) compiler.  @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2303and comment preprocessing on
2304the input file(s) before assembling them.  @xref{Preprocessing,
2305,Preprocessing}.
2306
2307@quotation
2308@emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2309preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2310not work correctly.
2311@end quotation
2312
2313@node I
2314@section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2315
2316@kindex -I @var{path}
2317@cindex paths for @code{.include}
2318@cindex search path for @code{.include}
2319@cindex @code{include} directive search path
2320Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2321@command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2322directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You may use @option{-I} as
2323many times as necessary to include a variety of paths.  The current
2324working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2325searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2326specified (left to right) on the command line.
2327
2328@node K
2329@section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2330
2331@kindex -K
2332@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2333On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect.  It is
2334permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2335where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2336generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables.  The @value{TARGET}
2337family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2338alteration on other platforms.
2339@end ifclear
2340
2341@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2342@cindex difference tables, warning
2343@cindex warning for altered difference tables
2344@command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2345form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2346You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2347is done.
2348@end ifset
2349
2350@node L
2351@section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2352
2353@kindex -L
2354@cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2355Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2356@samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2357called @dfn{local symbols}.  @xref{Symbol Names}.  Normally you do not see
2358such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2359programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2360notice.  Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2361such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2362
2363This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2364in the object file.  Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2365@code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2366
2367@node listing
2368@section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2369
2370The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2371@samp{-a} (@pxref{a}).  This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2372hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2373them as a listing file.  The format of this listing can be controlled by
2374directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2375@code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2376@code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2377@code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2378
2379@table @gcctabopt
2380@item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2381@kindex --listing-lhs-width
2382@cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2383Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump.  This
2384dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2385
2386@item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2387@kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2388@cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2389Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2390a given input source line.  If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2391the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}.  If neither
2392switch is used the default is to one.
2393
2394@item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2395@kindex --listing-rhs-width
2396@cindex Width of source line output
2397Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2398alongside the hex dump.  The default value for this parameter is 100.  The
2399source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2400
2401@item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2402@kindex --listing-cont-lines
2403@cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2404Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2405displayed for a given single line of source input.  The default value is 4.
2406@end table
2407
2408@node M
2409@section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2410
2411@kindex -M
2412@cindex MRI compatibility mode
2413The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode.  This
2414changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2415compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2416configured target) assembler from Microtec Research.  The exact nature of the
2417MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2418information.  Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2419arguments is somewhat different.  The purpose of this option is to permit
2420assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2421
2422The MRI compatibility is not complete.  Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2423depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2424file formats.  Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2425individually.  These are:
2426
2427@itemize @bullet
2428@item global symbols in common section
2429
2430The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2431Other object file formats do not support this.  @command{@value{AS}} handles
2432common sections by treating them as a single common symbol.  It permits local
2433symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2434symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2435
2436@item complex relocations
2437
2438The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2439relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections.  These
2440are not support by other object file formats.
2441
2442@item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2443
2444The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2445This is not supported by other object file formats.  The start address may
2446instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2447script.
2448
2449@item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2450
2451The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2452name to the output file.  This is not supported by other object file formats.
2453
2454@item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2455
2456The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2457address.  This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2458which changes the location within the current section.  Absolute sections are
2459not supported by other object file formats.  The address of a section may be
2460assigned within a linker script.
2461@end itemize
2462
2463There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2464@command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2465seem of little consequence.  Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2466
2467@itemize @bullet
2468
2469@item EBCDIC strings
2470
2471EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2472
2473@item packed binary coded decimal
2474
2475Packed binary coded decimal is not supported.  This means that the @code{DC.P}
2476and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2477
2478@item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2479
2480The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2481
2482@item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2483
2484The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2485
2486@item @code{OPT} branch control options
2487
2488The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2489@code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2490relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2491these options serve no purpose.
2492
2493@item @code{OPT} list control options
2494
2495The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2496@code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2497@code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2498
2499@item other @code{OPT} options
2500
2501The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2502@code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2503
2504@item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2505
2506The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2507@code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2508
2509@item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2510
2511The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2512
2513@item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2514
2515The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2516
2517@item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2518
2519The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2520
2521@item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2522
2523The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2524
2525@item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2526
2527The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2528
2529@item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2530
2531The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2532
2533@item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2534
2535The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2536
2537@end itemize
2538
2539@node MD
2540@section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2541
2542@kindex --MD
2543@cindex dependency tracking
2544@cindex make rules
2545
2546@command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates.  This
2547file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2548dependencies of the main source file.
2549
2550The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2551
2552This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2553
2554@node no-pad-sections
2555@section Output Section Padding
2556@kindex --no-pad-sections
2557@cindex output section padding
2558Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2559alignment boundary.  But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2560memory constrained targets.  So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2561disable this behaviour.
2562
2563@node o
2564@section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2565
2566@kindex -o
2567@cindex naming object file
2568@cindex object file name
2569There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}.  By
2570default it has the name
2571@ifset GENERIC
2572@ifset I960
2573@file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2574@end ifset
2575@ifclear I960
2576@file{a.out}.
2577@end ifclear
2578@end ifset
2579@ifclear GENERIC
2580@ifset I960
2581@file{b.out}.
2582@end ifset
2583@ifclear I960
2584@file{a.out}.
2585@end ifclear
2586@end ifclear
2587You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2588object file a different name.
2589
2590Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2591existing file of the same name.
2592
2593@node R
2594@section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2595
2596@kindex -R
2597@cindex data and text sections, joining
2598@cindex text and data sections, joining
2599@cindex joining text and data sections
2600@cindex merging text and data sections
2601@option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2602data-section data lives in the text section.  This is only done at
2603the very last moment:  your binary data are the same, but data
2604section parts are relocated differently.  The data section part of
2605your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2606appended to the text section.  (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2607
2608When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2609address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2610data section).  We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2611older versions of @command{@value{AS}}.  In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2612
2613@ifset COFF-ELF
2614When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2615this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2616@samp{.data}.
2617@end ifset
2618
2619@ifset HPPA
2620@option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets.  Using
2621@option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2622@end ifset
2623
2624@node statistics
2625@section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2626
2627@kindex --statistics
2628@cindex statistics, about assembly
2629@cindex time, total for assembly
2630@cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2631Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2632@command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2633(in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2634seconds).
2635
2636@node traditional-format
2637@section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2638
2639@kindex --traditional-format
2640For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2641from the output of some existing assembler.  This switch requests
2642@command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2643
2644For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2645@command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2646
2647@node v
2648@section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2649
2650@kindex -v
2651@kindex -version
2652@cindex assembler version
2653@cindex version of assembler
2654You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2655option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2656command line.
2657
2658@node W
2659@section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2660
2661@command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2662assembling compiler output.  But programs written by people often
2663cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2664made.  All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2665
2666@kindex -W
2667@kindex --no-warn
2668@cindex suppressing warnings
2669@cindex warnings, suppressing
2670If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2671This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2672how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file.  Errors, which stop the assembly,
2673are still reported.
2674
2675@kindex --fatal-warnings
2676@cindex errors, caused by warnings
2677@cindex warnings, causing error
2678If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2679files that generate warnings to be in error.
2680
2681@kindex --warn
2682@cindex warnings, switching on
2683You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2684causes warnings to be output as usual.
2685
2686@node Z
2687@section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2688@cindex object file, after errors
2689@cindex errors, continuing after
2690After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output.  If for
2691some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2692@command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2693option.  If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2694writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2695errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2696
2697@node Syntax
2698@chapter Syntax
2699
2700@cindex machine-independent syntax
2701@cindex syntax, machine-independent
2702This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2703source file.  @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2704assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2705@ifclear VAX
2706assembler.
2707@end ifclear
2708@ifset VAX
2709assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2710@end ifset
2711
2712@menu
2713* Preprocessing::               Preprocessing
2714* Whitespace::                  Whitespace
2715* Comments::                    Comments
2716* Symbol Intro::                Symbols
2717* Statements::                  Statements
2718* Constants::                   Constants
2719@end menu
2720
2721@node Preprocessing
2722@section Preprocessing
2723
2724@cindex preprocessing
2725The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2726@itemize @bullet
2727@cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2728@item
2729adjusts and removes extra whitespace.  It leaves one space or tab before
2730the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2731a single space.
2732
2733@cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2734@item
2735removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2736appropriate number of newlines.
2737
2738@cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2739@item
2740converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2741@end itemize
2742
2743It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2744anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor.  You can
2745do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2746(@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2747to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2748@samp{.S} suffix.  @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2749Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2750
2751Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2752cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2753preprocessed.
2754
2755@cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2756@cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2757@kindex #NO_APP
2758@kindex #APP
2759If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2760@samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2761Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2762specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2763text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2764@code{#NO_APP} after this text.  This feature is mainly intend to support
2765@code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2766and whitespace.
2767
2768@node Whitespace
2769@section Whitespace
2770
2771@cindex whitespace
2772@dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2773Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2774people to read.  Unless within character constants
2775(@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2776as exactly one space.
2777
2778@node Comments
2779@section Comments
2780
2781@cindex comments
2782There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}.  In both
2783cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2784
2785Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2786This means you may not nest these comments.
2787
2788@smallexample
2789/*
2790  The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2791  is to use this sort of comment.
2792*/
2793
2794/* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2795@end smallexample
2796
2797@cindex line comment character
2798Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2799considered a comment and is ignored.  The line comment character is target
2800specific, and some targets multiple comment characters.  Some targets also have
2801line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2802line.  Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2803comment.  Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2804upon command line options that have been used.  For more details see the
2805@emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2806
2807If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2808special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2809to specify logical line numbers:
2810
2811@kindex #
2812@cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2813@cindex logical line numbers
2814To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2815special interpretation.  Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2816expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2817line.  Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2818new logical file name.  The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2819
2820If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2821the line is ignored.  (Just like a comment.)
2822
2823@smallexample
2824                          # This is an ordinary comment.
2825# 42-6 "new_file_name"    # New logical file name
2826                          # This is logical line # 36.
2827@end smallexample
2828This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2829of @command{@value{AS}}.
2830
2831@node Symbol Intro
2832@section Symbols
2833
2834@cindex characters used in symbols
2835@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2836A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2837letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2838@samp{_.$}.
2839@end ifclear
2840@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2841@ifclear GENERIC
2842@ifset H8
2843A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2844letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2845@samp{._$}.  (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2846symbol names.)
2847@end ifset
2848@end ifclear
2849@end ifset
2850@ifset GENERIC
2851On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2852are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2853@end ifset
2854No symbol may begin with a digit.  Case is significant.
2855There is no length limit; all characters are significant.  Multibyte characters
2856are supported.  Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2857beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2858of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter).  @xref{Symbols}.
2859
2860Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters.  In such
2861cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character.  If a double
2862quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2863backslash @code{\} character.
2864@cindex length of symbols
2865
2866@node Statements
2867@section Statements
2868
2869@cindex statements, structure of
2870@cindex line separator character
2871@cindex statement separator character
2872
2873A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2874@dfn{line separator character}.  The line separator character is target
2875specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2876target's documentation.  Not all targets support a line separator character.
2877The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2878preceding statement.  Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2879exception: they do not end statements.
2880
2881@cindex newline, required at file end
2882@cindex EOF, newline must precede
2883It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file:  the last
2884character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2885
2886An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace.  It is ignored.
2887
2888@cindex instructions and directives
2889@cindex directives and instructions
2890@c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2891@c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously...  doc@cygnus.com,
2892@c 13feb91.
2893A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2894key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is.  The key
2895symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement.  If the
2896symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2897directive: typically valid for any computer.  If the symbol begins with
2898a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2899assembles into a machine language instruction.
2900@ifset GENERIC
2901Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2902recognize different instructions.  In fact, the same symbol may
2903represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2904language.@refill
2905@end ifset
2906
2907@cindex @code{:} (label)
2908@cindex label (@code{:})
2909A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2910Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2911have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2912
2913@ifset HPPA
2914For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2915the definition of a label must begin in column zero.  This also implies that
2916only one label may be defined on each line.
2917@end ifset
2918
2919@smallexample
2920label:     .directive    followed by something
2921another_label:           # This is an empty statement.
2922           instruction   operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2923@end smallexample
2924
2925@node Constants
2926@section Constants
2927
2928@cindex constants
2929A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2930inspection, without knowing any context.  Like this:
2931@smallexample
2932@group
2933.byte  74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2934.ascii "Ring the bell\7"                  # A string constant.
2935.octa  0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2936.float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
293795028841971.693993751E-40                 # - pi, a flonum.
2938@end group
2939@end smallexample
2940
2941@menu
2942* Characters::                  Character Constants
2943* Numbers::                     Number Constants
2944@end menu
2945
2946@node Characters
2947@subsection Character Constants
2948
2949@cindex character constants
2950@cindex constants, character
2951There are two kinds of character constants.  A @dfn{character} stands
2952for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2953numeric expressions.  String constants (properly called string
2954@emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2955used in arithmetic expressions.
2956
2957@menu
2958* Strings::                     Strings
2959* Chars::                       Characters
2960@end menu
2961
2962@node Strings
2963@subsubsection Strings
2964
2965@cindex string constants
2966@cindex constants, string
2967A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes.  It may contain
2968double-quotes or null characters.  The way to get special characters
2969into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2970a backslash @samp{\} character.  For example @samp{\\} represents
2971one backslash:  the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2972@command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2973(which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2974escape character).  The complete list of escapes follows.
2975
2976@cindex escape codes, character
2977@cindex character escape codes
2978@c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2979@c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2980@c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2981@c NOTE:   \initial {\\}
2982@c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2983@c NOTE:   Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2984@c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2985@c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2986@table @kbd
2987@c      @item \a
2988@c      Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2989@c
2990@cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
2991@cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2992@item \b
2993Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2994
2995@c      @item \e
2996@c      Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2997@c
2998@cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
2999@cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3000@item backslash-f
3001Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3002
3003@cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3004@cindex newline (@code{\n})
3005@item \n
3006Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3007
3008@c      @item \p
3009@c      Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3010@c
3011@cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3012@cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3013@item \r
3014Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3015
3016@c      @item \s
3017@c      Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040.  Included for compliance with
3018@c      other assemblers.
3019@c
3020@cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3021@cindex tab (@code{\t})
3022@item \t
3023Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3024
3025@c      @item \v
3026@c      Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3027@c      @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3028@c      A hexadecimal character code.  The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3029@c
3030@cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3031@cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3032@item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3033An octal character code.  The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3034For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3035for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3036
3037@cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3038@cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3039@item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3040A hex character code.  All trailing hex digits are combined.  Either upper or
3041lower case @code{x} works.
3042
3043@cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3044@cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3045@item \\
3046Represents one @samp{\} character.
3047
3048@c      @item \'
3049@c      Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3050@c      This is needed in single character literals
3051@c      (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3052@c      a @samp{'}.
3053@c
3054@cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3055@cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3056@item \"
3057Represents one @samp{"} character.  Needed in strings to represent
3058this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3059
3060@item \ @var{anything-else}
3061Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3062assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present.  The idea is that if
3063you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3064interpretation of the following character.  However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3065other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3066code and warns you of the fact.
3067@end table
3068
3069Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3070varies widely among assemblers.  The current set is what we think
3071the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3072compilers recognize.  If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3073sequence.
3074
3075@node Chars
3076@subsubsection Characters
3077
3078@cindex single character constant
3079@cindex character, single
3080@cindex constant, single character
3081A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3082that character.  Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3083@code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3084as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote.  So if you want to write the
3085character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3086the second @code{\}.  As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3087accent.  A newline
3088@ifclear GENERIC
3089@ifclear abnormal-separator
3090(or semicolon @samp{;})
3091@end ifclear
3092@ifset abnormal-separator
3093@ifset H8
3094(or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3095Renesas SH)
3096@end ifset
3097@end ifset
3098@end ifclear
3099immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3100and does not count as the end of a statement.  The value of a character
3101constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3102that character.  @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3103@kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3104
3105@node Numbers
3106@subsection Number Constants
3107
3108@cindex constants, number
3109@cindex number constants
3110@command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3111are stored in the target machine.  @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3112would fit into an @code{int} in the C language.  @emph{Bignums} are
3113integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits.  @emph{Flonums}
3114are floating point numbers, described below.
3115
3116@menu
3117* Integers::                    Integers
3118* Bignums::                     Bignums
3119* Flonums::                     Flonums
3120@ifclear GENERIC
3121@ifset I960
3122* Bit Fields::                  Bit Fields
3123@end ifset
3124@end ifclear
3125@end menu
3126
3127@node Integers
3128@subsubsection Integers
3129@cindex integers
3130@cindex constants, integer
3131
3132@cindex binary integers
3133@cindex integers, binary
3134A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3135the binary digits @samp{01}.
3136
3137@cindex octal integers
3138@cindex integers, octal
3139An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3140digits (@samp{01234567}).
3141
3142@cindex decimal integers
3143@cindex integers, decimal
3144A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3145more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3146
3147@cindex hexadecimal integers
3148@cindex integers, hexadecimal
3149A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3150more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3151
3152Integers have the usual values.  To denote a negative integer, use
3153the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3154(@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3155
3156@node Bignums
3157@subsubsection Bignums
3158
3159@cindex bignums
3160@cindex constants, bignum
3161A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3162except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3163represent in binary.  The distinction is made because in some places
3164integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3165
3166@node Flonums
3167@subsubsection Flonums
3168@cindex flonums
3169@cindex floating point numbers
3170@cindex constants, floating point
3171
3172@cindex precision, floating point
3173A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number.  The translation is
3174indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3175@command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3176sufficient precision.  This generic floating point number is converted
3177to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3178portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3179
3180A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3181@itemize @bullet
3182@item
3183The digit @samp{0}.
3184@ifset HPPA
3185(@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3186@end ifset
3187
3188@item
3189A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3190@ifset GENERIC
3191@kbd{e} is recommended.  Case is not important.
3192@ignore
3193@c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3194(Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed.  Vax BSD
31954.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3196@end ignore
3197
3198On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3199and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3200one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3201
3202On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3203(in upper or lower case).
3204
3205On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3206one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3207
3208On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3209@end ifset
3210@ifclear GENERIC
3211@ifset ARC
3212One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3213@end ifset
3214@ifset H8
3215One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3216@end ifset
3217@ifset HPPA
3218The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3219@end ifset
3220@ifset I960
3221One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3222@end ifset
3223@end ifclear
3224
3225@item
3226An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3227
3228@item
3229An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3230
3231@item
3232An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3233or more decimal digits.
3234
3235@item
3236An optional exponent, consisting of:
3237
3238@itemize @bullet
3239@item
3240An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3241@c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3242@c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3243@item
3244Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3245@item
3246One or more decimal digits.
3247@end itemize
3248
3249@end itemize
3250
3251At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3252present.  The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3253
3254@command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers.  Flonums are computed
3255independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3256@command{@value{AS}}.
3257
3258@ifclear GENERIC
3259@ifset I960
3260@c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3261@c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3262@c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3263@node Bit Fields
3264@subsubsection Bit Fields
3265
3266@cindex bit fields
3267@cindex constants, bit field
3268You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3269Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3270@example
3271@var{mask}:@var{value}
3272@end example
3273@noindent
3274@command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3275@var{value}.
3276
3277The resulting number is then packed
3278@ifset GENERIC
3279@c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3280(in host-dependent byte order)
3281@end ifset
3282into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3283bit-field as its argument.  Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3284requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3285more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3286least significant digits.@refill
3287
3288The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3289@code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3290@end ifset
3291@end ifclear
3292
3293@node Sections
3294@chapter Sections and Relocation
3295@cindex sections
3296@cindex relocation
3297
3298@menu
3299* Secs Background::             Background
3300* Ld Sections::                 Linker Sections
3301* As Sections::                 Assembler Internal Sections
3302* Sub-Sections::                Sub-Sections
3303* bss::                         bss Section
3304@end menu
3305
3306@node Secs Background
3307@section Background
3308
3309Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3310``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3311For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3312
3313@cindex linker, and assembler
3314@cindex assembler, and linker
3315The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3316combines their contents to form a runnable program.  When @command{@value{AS}}
3317emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3318@code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3319different partial programs do not overlap.  This is actually an
3320oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3321sections.
3322
3323@code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3324addresses.  These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3325units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3326within them.  Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}.  Assigning
3327run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}.  It includes
3328the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3329the proper run-time addresses.
3330@ifset H8
3331For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3332@command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3333ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3334@end ifset
3335
3336@cindex standard assembler sections
3337An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3338of which may be empty.  These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3339@dfn{bss} sections.
3340
3341@ifset COFF-ELF
3342@ifset GENERIC
3343When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3344@end ifset
3345@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3346using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3347If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3348or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3349@end ifset
3350
3351@ifset HPPA
3352@ifset GENERIC
3353When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3354@end ifset
3355@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3356specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives.  See
3357@cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3358(HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3359assembler directives.
3360
3361@ifset SOM
3362Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3363text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output.  Program text
3364is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3365BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3366@end ifset
3367@end ifset
3368
3369Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3370data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3371
3372@ifset HPPA
3373When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3374section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3375@code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3376@end ifset
3377
3378To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3379relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3380object file details of the relocation needed.  To perform relocation
3381@code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3382file is mentioned:
3383@itemize @bullet
3384@item
3385Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3386an address?
3387@item
3388How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3389@item
3390Which section does the address refer to?  What is the numeric value of
3391@display
3392(@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3393@end display
3394@item
3395Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3396@end itemize
3397
3398@cindex addresses, format of
3399@cindex section-relative addressing
3400In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3401@display
3402(@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3403@end display
3404@noindent
3405Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3406nature.
3407@ifset SOM
3408(For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3409symbol-relative instead.)
3410@end ifset
3411
3412In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3413@var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3414
3415Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3416@dfn{absolute} section.  When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3417addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged.  For example, address
3418@code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3419@code{@value{LD}}.  Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3420data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3421their absolute sections must overlap.  Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3422part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3423address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3424
3425The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section.  Any
3426address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3427rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3428Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3429address is to mention an undefined symbol.  A reference to a named
3430common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3431time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3432
3433By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3434the linked program.  @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3435sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program.  It is
3436customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3437the addresses of all partial programs' text sections.  Likewise for
3438data and bss sections.
3439
3440Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3441use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3442
3443@node Ld Sections
3444@section Linker Sections
3445@code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3446
3447@table @strong
3448
3449@ifset COFF-ELF
3450@cindex named sections
3451@cindex sections, named
3452@item named sections
3453@end ifset
3454@ifset aout-bout
3455@cindex text section
3456@cindex data section
3457@itemx text section
3458@itemx data section
3459@end ifset
3460These sections hold your program.  @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3461separate but equal sections.  Anything you can say of one section is
3462true of another.
3463@c @ifset aout-bout
3464When the program is running, however, it is
3465customary for the text section to be unalterable.  The
3466text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3467instructions, constants and the like.  The data section of a running
3468program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3469in the data section.
3470@c @end ifset
3471
3472@cindex bss section
3473@item bss section
3474This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running.  It
3475is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage.  The length of
3476each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3477out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3478bytes in the object file.  The bss section was invented to eliminate
3479those explicit zeros from object files.
3480
3481@cindex absolute section
3482@item absolute section
3483Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3484This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3485not change when relocating.  In this sense we speak of absolute
3486addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3487
3488@cindex undefined section
3489@item undefined section
3490This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3491the preceding sections.
3492@c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3493@end table
3494
3495@cindex relocation example
3496An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3497@ifset COFF-ELF
3498The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3499@end ifset
3500Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3501
3502@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3503@ifnottex
3504@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3505@smallexample
3506                      +-----+----+--+
3507partial program # 1:  |ttttt|dddd|00|
3508                      +-----+----+--+
3509
3510                      text   data bss
3511                      seg.   seg. seg.
3512
3513                      +---+---+---+
3514partial program # 2:  |TTT|DDD|000|
3515                      +---+---+---+
3516
3517                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3518linked program:       |  |TTT|ttttt|  |dddd|DDD|00000|
3519                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3520
3521    addresses:        0 @dots{}
3522@end smallexample
3523@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3524@end ifnottex
3525@need 5000
3526@tex
3527\bigskip
3528\line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3529\line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3530\line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3531
3532\line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3533\line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3534\line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3535
3536\line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3537\line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3538\line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3539ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3540DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3541
3542\line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3543\line{0\dots\hfil}
3544
3545@end tex
3546@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3547
3548@node As Sections
3549@section Assembler Internal Sections
3550
3551@cindex internal assembler sections
3552@cindex sections in messages, internal
3553These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}.  They
3554have no meaning at run-time.  You do not really need to know about these
3555sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3556warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3557meanings to @command{@value{AS}}.  These sections are used to permit the
3558value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3559section-relative address.
3560
3561@table @b
3562@cindex assembler internal logic error
3563@item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3564An internal assembler logic error has been found.  This means there is a
3565bug in the assembler.
3566
3567@cindex expr (internal section)
3568@item expr section
3569The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3570symbols.  When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3571it in the expr section.
3572@c FIXME item debug
3573@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3574@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3575@c FIXME item register
3576@end table
3577
3578@node Sub-Sections
3579@section Sub-Sections
3580
3581@cindex numbered subsections
3582@cindex grouping data
3583@ifset aout-bout
3584Assembled bytes
3585@ifset COFF-ELF
3586conventionally
3587@end ifset
3588fall into two sections: text and data.
3589@end ifset
3590You may have separate groups of
3591@ifset GENERIC
3592data in named sections
3593@end ifset
3594@ifclear GENERIC
3595@ifclear aout-bout
3596data in named sections
3597@end ifclear
3598@ifset aout-bout
3599text or data
3600@end ifset
3601@end ifclear
3602that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3603are not contiguous in the assembler source.  @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3604use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose.  Within each section, there can be
3605numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192.  Objects assembled into the
3606same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3607subsection.  For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3608section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3609assembled.  In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3610section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3611constants being output.
3612
3613Subsections are optional.  If you do not use subsections, everything
3614goes in subsection number zero.
3615
3616@ifset GENERIC
3617Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3618(Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3619of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3620@end ifset
3621@ifclear GENERIC
3622@ifset H8
3623On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3624boundary (two bytes).
3625The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3626@end ifset
3627@ifset I960
3628@c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3629@c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3630@c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3631@c so for now I say nothing about it.  If this is a generic BFD issue,
3632@c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3633@c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3634@end ifset
3635@end ifclear
3636
3637Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3638to highest.  (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3639The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3640other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3641They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3642data subsections as a data section.
3643
3644To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3645into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3646@var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3647@ifset COFF
3648@ifset GENERIC
3649When generating COFF output, you
3650@end ifset
3651@ifclear GENERIC
3652You
3653@end ifclear
3654can also use an extra subsection
3655argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3656@var{expression}}.
3657@end ifset
3658@ifset ELF
3659@ifset GENERIC
3660When generating ELF output, you
3661@end ifset
3662@ifclear GENERIC
3663You
3664@end ifclear
3665can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3666to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3667@end ifset
3668@var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3669(@pxref{Expressions}).  If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3670is assumed.  Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}.  Assembly
3671begins in @code{text 0}.  For instance:
3672@smallexample
3673.text 0     # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3674.ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3675.text 1
3676.ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3677.data 0
3678.ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3679.ascii "in the first data subsection."
3680.text 0
3681.ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3682.ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3683@end smallexample
3684
3685Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3686assembled into that section.  Because subsections are merely a convenience
3687restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3688counter.  There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3689@code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3690current value.  The location counter of the section where statements are being
3691assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3692
3693@node bss
3694@section bss Section
3695
3696@cindex bss section
3697@cindex common variable storage
3698The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3699You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3700not dictate data to load into it before your program executes.  When
3701your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3702section are zeroed bytes.
3703
3704The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3705@ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3706
3707The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3708another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3709
3710@ifset GENERIC
3711When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3712COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3713see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}.  You may only assemble zero values into the
3714section.  Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3715@code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3716@end ifset
3717
3718@node Symbols
3719@chapter Symbols
3720
3721@cindex symbols
3722Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3723things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3724to debug.
3725
3726@quotation
3727@cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3728@emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3729the same order they were declared.  This may break some debuggers.
3730@end quotation
3731
3732@menu
3733* Labels::                      Labels
3734* Setting Symbols::             Giving Symbols Other Values
3735* Symbol Names::                Symbol Names
3736* Dot::                         The Special Dot Symbol
3737* Symbol Attributes::           Symbol Attributes
3738@end menu
3739
3740@node Labels
3741@section Labels
3742
3743@cindex labels
3744A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3745@samp{:}.  The symbol then represents the current value of the
3746active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3747operand.  You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3748different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3749definitions.
3750
3751@ifset HPPA
3752On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3753colon, but instead must start in column zero.  Only one label may be defined on
3754a single line.  To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3755provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3756@end ifset
3757
3758@node Setting Symbols
3759@section Giving Symbols Other Values
3760
3761@cindex assigning values to symbols
3762@cindex symbol values, assigning
3763A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3764by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3765(@pxref{Expressions}).  This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3766directive.  @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}.  In the same way, using a double
3767equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3768@code{.eqv} directive.  @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3769
3770@ifset Blackfin
3771Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3772@end ifset
3773
3774@node Symbol Names
3775@section Symbol Names
3776
3777@cindex symbol names
3778@cindex names, symbol
3779@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3780Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On most
3781machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3782noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.  That character may be followed by any
3783string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3784particular target machine), and underscores.
3785@end ifclear
3786@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3787@ifset H8
3788Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On the
3789Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names.  That
3790character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3791on the H8/300), and underscores.
3792@end ifset
3793@end ifset
3794
3795Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3796than @code{Foo}.
3797
3798Symbol names do not start with a digit.  An exception to this rule is made for
3799Local Labels.  See below.
3800
3801Multibyte characters are supported.  To generate a symbol name containing
3802multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3803@xref{Strings}.  Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3804currently supported.
3805
3806Each symbol has exactly one name.  Each name in an assembly language program
3807refers to exactly one symbol.  You may use that symbol name any number of times
3808in a program.
3809
3810@subheading Local Symbol Names
3811
3812@cindex local symbol names
3813@cindex symbol names, local
3814A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3815By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3816@samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3817set of local label prefixes.
3818@ifset HPPA
3819On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3820@end ifset
3821
3822Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3823normally not saved in object files.  Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3824You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3825to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3826
3827@subheading Local Labels
3828
3829@cindex local labels
3830@cindex temporary symbol names
3831@cindex symbol names, temporary
3832Local labels are different from local symbols.  Local labels help compilers and
3833programmers use names temporarily.  They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3834be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3835referred to by a simple notation.  To define a local label, write a label of
3836the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3837To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3838@samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label.  To refer
3839to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}.  The @samp{b}
3840stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3841
3842There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3843too.  So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3844the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3845defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3846definition of a specific local label for a forward reference.  It is also worth
3847noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3848implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3849
3850Here is an example:
3851
3852@smallexample
38531:        branch 1f
38542:        branch 1b
38551:        branch 2f
38562:        branch 1b
3857@end smallexample
3858
3859Which is the equivalent of:
3860
3861@smallexample
3862label_1:  branch label_3
3863label_2:  branch label_1
3864label_3:  branch label_4
3865label_4:  branch label_3
3866@end smallexample
3867
3868Local label names are only a notational device.  They are immediately
3869transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3870The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3871are optionally emitted to the object file.  The names are constructed using
3872these parts:
3873
3874@table @code
3875@item @emph{local label prefix}
3876All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3877Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3878that start with the local label prefix.  These labels are
3879used for symbols you are never intended to see.  If you use the
3880@samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3881object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3882you may use them in debugging.
3883
3884@item @var{number}
3885This is the number that was used in the local label definition.  So if the
3886label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3887
3888@item @kbd{C-B}
3889This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3890of the same name.  The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3891
3892@item @emph{ordinal number}
3893This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct.  The first definition of
3894@samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}.  The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3895number @samp{15}, and so on.  Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3896the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3897@end table
3898
3899So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3900the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3901
3902@subheading Dollar Local Labels
3903@cindex dollar local symbols
3904
3905On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3906local labels called dollar labels.  These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3907become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined.  Thus they remain
3908valid for only a small region of the input source code.  Normal local labels,
3909by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3910by another occurrence of the same local label.
3911
3912Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3913except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3914@samp{@b{55$:}}.
3915
3916They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3917names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3918to distinguish them from ordinary labels.  For example, the fifth definition of
3919@samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3920
3921@node Dot
3922@section The Special Dot Symbol
3923
3924@cindex dot (symbol)
3925@cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3926@cindex current address
3927@cindex location counter
3928The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3929@command{@value{AS}} is assembling into.  Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3930.long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3931Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3932directive.
3933@ifclear no-space-dir
3934Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3935@samp{.space 4}.
3936@end ifclear
3937
3938@node Symbol Attributes
3939@section Symbol Attributes
3940
3941@cindex symbol attributes
3942@cindex attributes, symbol
3943Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3944``Type''.  Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3945attributes.
3946@ifset INTERNALS
3947The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3948@end ifset
3949
3950If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3951all these attributes, and probably won't warn you.  This makes the
3952symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3953would want.
3954
3955@menu
3956* Symbol Value::                Value
3957* Symbol Type::                 Type
3958@ifset aout-bout
3959@ifset GENERIC
3960* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3961@end ifset
3962@ifclear GENERIC
3963@ifclear BOUT
3964* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3965@end ifclear
3966@ifset BOUT
3967* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3968@end ifset
3969@end ifclear
3970@end ifset
3971@ifset COFF
3972* COFF Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for COFF
3973@end ifset
3974@ifset SOM
3975* SOM Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for SOM
3976@end ifset
3977@end menu
3978
3979@node Symbol Value
3980@subsection Value
3981
3982@cindex value of a symbol
3983@cindex symbol value
3984The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits.  For a symbol which labels a
3985location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3986number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3987Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3988as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking.  Absolute
3989symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3990called absolute.
3991
3992The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way.  If it is
39930 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3994@code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3995same program.  You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3996name without defining it.  A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3997common declaration.  The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3998bytes (addresses).  The symbol refers to the first address of the
3999allocated storage.
4000
4001@node Symbol Type
4002@subsection Type
4003
4004@cindex type of a symbol
4005@cindex symbol type
4006The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4007information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4008(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers.  The exact
4009format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4010
4011@ifset aout-bout
4012@ifclear GENERIC
4013@ifset BOUT
4014@c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title.  @group would be
4015@c better if it were available outside examples.
4016@need 1000
4017@node a.out Symbols
4018@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
4019
4020@cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
4021@cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
4022These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
4023one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
4024@code{b.out}.
4025
4026@end ifset
4027@ifclear BOUT
4028@node a.out Symbols
4029@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4030
4031@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4032@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4033
4034@end ifclear
4035@end ifclear
4036@ifset GENERIC
4037@node a.out Symbols
4038@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4039
4040@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4041@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4042
4043@end ifset
4044@menu
4045* Symbol Desc::                 Descriptor
4046* Symbol Other::                Other
4047@end menu
4048
4049@node Symbol Desc
4050@subsubsection Descriptor
4051
4052@cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4053This is an arbitrary 16-bit value.  You may establish a symbol's
4054descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4055(@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}).  A descriptor value means nothing to
4056@command{@value{AS}}.
4057
4058@node Symbol Other
4059@subsubsection Other
4060
4061@cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4062This is an arbitrary 8-bit value.  It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4063@end ifset
4064
4065@ifset COFF
4066@node COFF Symbols
4067@subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4068
4069@cindex COFF symbol attributes
4070@cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4071
4072The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4073like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4074@code{.endef} directives.
4075
4076@subsubsection Primary Attributes
4077
4078@cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4079The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4080respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4081
4082@subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4083
4084@cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4085The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4086@code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4087table information for COFF.
4088@end ifset
4089
4090@ifset SOM
4091@node SOM Symbols
4092@subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4093
4094@cindex SOM symbol attributes
4095@cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4096
4097The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4098the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4099
4100The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4101Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4102@code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4103@end ifset
4104
4105@node Expressions
4106@chapter Expressions
4107
4108@cindex expressions
4109@cindex addresses
4110@cindex numeric values
4111An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4112Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4113
4114The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4115a particular section.  If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4116enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4117section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4118the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4119@command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4120
4121@menu
4122* Empty Exprs::                 Empty Expressions
4123* Integer Exprs::               Integer Expressions
4124@end menu
4125
4126@node Empty Exprs
4127@section Empty Expressions
4128
4129@cindex empty expressions
4130@cindex expressions, empty
4131An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4132Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4133expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0.  This
4134is compatible with other assemblers.
4135
4136@node Integer Exprs
4137@section Integer Expressions
4138
4139@cindex integer expressions
4140@cindex expressions, integer
4141An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4142by @emph{operators}.
4143
4144@menu
4145* Arguments::                   Arguments
4146* Operators::                   Operators
4147* Prefix Ops::                  Prefix Operators
4148* Infix Ops::                   Infix Operators
4149@end menu
4150
4151@node Arguments
4152@subsection Arguments
4153
4154@cindex expression arguments
4155@cindex arguments in expressions
4156@cindex operands in expressions
4157@cindex arithmetic operands
4158@dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions.  In other
4159contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''.  In
4160this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4161the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4162expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4163instruction operands.
4164
4165Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4166@var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4167or undefined.  @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4168integer.
4169
4170Numbers are usually integers.
4171
4172A number can be a flonum or bignum.  In this case, you are warned
4173that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4174these 32 bits are an integer.  You may write integer-manipulating
4175instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4176assemblers.
4177
4178@cindex subexpressions
4179Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4180expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4181operator followed by an argument.
4182
4183@node Operators
4184@subsection Operators
4185
4186@cindex operators, in expressions
4187@cindex arithmetic functions
4188@cindex functions, in expressions
4189@dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}.  Prefix
4190operators are followed by an argument.  Infix operators appear
4191between their arguments.  Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4192whitespace.
4193
4194@node Prefix Ops
4195@subsection Prefix Operator
4196
4197@cindex prefix operators
4198@command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}.  They each take
4199one argument, which must be absolute.
4200
4201@c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4202@c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4203@c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4204@tex
4205\global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4206@end tex
4207
4208@table @code
4209@item -
4210@dfn{Negation}.  Two's complement negation.
4211@item ~
4212@dfn{Complementation}.  Bitwise not.
4213@end table
4214
4215@tex
4216\global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4217@end tex
4218
4219@node Infix Ops
4220@subsection Infix Operators
4221
4222@cindex infix operators
4223@cindex operators, permitted arguments
4224@dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side.  Operators
4225have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4226to right.  Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4227absolute, and the result is absolute.
4228
4229@enumerate
4230@cindex operator precedence
4231@cindex precedence of operators
4232
4233@item
4234Highest Precedence
4235
4236@table @code
4237@item *
4238@dfn{Multiplication}.
4239
4240@item /
4241@dfn{Division}.  Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4242
4243@item %
4244@dfn{Remainder}.
4245
4246@item <<
4247@dfn{Shift Left}.  Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4248
4249@item >>
4250@dfn{Shift Right}.  Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4251@end table
4252
4253@item
4254Intermediate precedence
4255
4256@table @code
4257@item |
4258
4259@dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4260
4261@item &
4262@dfn{Bitwise And}.
4263
4264@item ^
4265@dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4266
4267@item !
4268@dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4269@end table
4270
4271@item
4272Low Precedence
4273
4274@table @code
4275@cindex addition, permitted arguments
4276@cindex plus, permitted arguments
4277@cindex arguments for addition
4278@item +
4279@dfn{Addition}.  If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4280the other argument.  You may not add together arguments from different
4281sections.
4282
4283@cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4284@cindex minus, permitted arguments
4285@cindex arguments for subtraction
4286@item -
4287@dfn{Subtraction}.  If the right argument is absolute, the
4288result has the section of the left argument.
4289If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4290You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4291@c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4292
4293@cindex comparison expressions
4294@cindex expressions, comparison
4295@item  ==
4296@dfn{Is Equal To}
4297@item <>
4298@itemx !=
4299@dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4300@item <
4301@dfn{Is Less Than}
4302@item >
4303@dfn{Is Greater Than}
4304@item >=
4305@dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4306@item <=
4307@dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4308
4309The comparison operators can be used as infix operators.  A true results has a
4310value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0.   Note, these operators
4311perform signed comparisons.
4312@end table
4313
4314@item Lowest Precedence
4315
4316@table @code
4317@item &&
4318@dfn{Logical And}.
4319
4320@item ||
4321@dfn{Logical Or}.
4322
4323These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4324expressions.  Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4325value of 1 but a false results does still return 0.  Also note that the logical
4326or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4327
4328@end table
4329@end enumerate
4330
4331In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4332address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4333
4334@node Pseudo Ops
4335@chapter Assembler Directives
4336
4337@cindex directives, machine independent
4338@cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4339@cindex machine independent directives
4340All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4341The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4342in lower case.
4343
4344This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4345target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4346@ifset GENERIC
4347Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4348@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4349@end ifset
4350@ifclear GENERIC
4351@ifset machine-directives
4352@xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4353@end ifset
4354@end ifclear
4355
4356@menu
4357* Abort::                       @code{.abort}
4358@ifset COFF
4359* ABORT (COFF)::                @code{.ABORT}
4360@end ifset
4361
4362* Align::                       @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4363* Altmacro::                    @code{.altmacro}
4364* Ascii::                       @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4365* Asciz::                       @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4366* Balign::                      @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4367* Bundle directives::           @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4368* Byte::                        @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4369* CFI directives::		@code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4370* Comm::                        @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4371* Data::                        @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4372@ifset COFF
4373* Def::                         @code{.def @var{name}}
4374@end ifset
4375@ifset aout-bout
4376* Desc::                        @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4377@end ifset
4378@ifset COFF
4379* Dim::                         @code{.dim}
4380@end ifset
4381
4382* Double::                      @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4383* Eject::                       @code{.eject}
4384* Else::                        @code{.else}
4385* Elseif::                      @code{.elseif}
4386* End::				@code{.end}
4387@ifset COFF
4388* Endef::                       @code{.endef}
4389@end ifset
4390
4391* Endfunc::                     @code{.endfunc}
4392* Endif::                       @code{.endif}
4393* Equ::                         @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4394* Equiv::                       @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4395* Eqv::                         @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4396* Err::				@code{.err}
4397* Error::			@code{.error @var{string}}
4398* Exitm::			@code{.exitm}
4399* Extern::                      @code{.extern}
4400* Fail::			@code{.fail}
4401* File::                        @code{.file}
4402* Fill::                        @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4403* Float::                       @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4404* Func::                        @code{.func}
4405* Global::                      @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4406@ifset ELF
4407* Gnu_attribute::               @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4408* Hidden::                      @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4409@end ifset
4410
4411* hword::                       @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4412* Ident::                       @code{.ident}
4413* If::                          @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4414* Incbin::                      @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4415* Include::                     @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4416* Int::                         @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4417@ifset ELF
4418* Internal::                    @code{.internal @var{names}}
4419@end ifset
4420
4421* Irp::				@code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4422* Irpc::			@code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4423* Lcomm::                       @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4424* Lflags::                      @code{.lflags}
4425@ifclear no-line-dir
4426* Line::                        @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4427@end ifclear
4428
4429* Linkonce::			@code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4430* List::                        @code{.list}
4431* Ln::                          @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4432* Loc::                         @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4433* Loc_mark_labels::             @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4434@ifset ELF
4435* Local::                       @code{.local @var{names}}
4436@end ifset
4437
4438* Long::                        @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4439@ignore
4440* Lsym::                        @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4441@end ignore
4442
4443* Macro::			@code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4444* MRI::				@code{.mri @var{val}}
4445* Noaltmacro::                  @code{.noaltmacro}
4446* Nolist::                      @code{.nolist}
4447* Octa::                        @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4448* Offset::			@code{.offset @var{loc}}
4449* Org::                         @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4450* P2align::                     @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4451@ifset ELF
4452* PopSection::                  @code{.popsection}
4453* Previous::                    @code{.previous}
4454@end ifset
4455
4456* Print::			@code{.print @var{string}}
4457@ifset ELF
4458* Protected::                   @code{.protected @var{names}}
4459@end ifset
4460
4461* Psize::                       @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4462* Purgem::			@code{.purgem @var{name}}
4463@ifset ELF
4464* PushSection::                 @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4465@end ifset
4466
4467* Quad::                        @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4468* Reloc::			@code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4469* Rept::			@code{.rept @var{count}}
4470* Sbttl::                       @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4471@ifset COFF
4472* Scl::                         @code{.scl @var{class}}
4473@end ifset
4474@ifset COFF-ELF
4475* Section::                     @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4476@end ifset
4477
4478* Set::                         @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4479* Short::                       @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4480* Single::                      @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4481@ifset COFF-ELF
4482* Size::                        @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4483@end ifset
4484@ifclear no-space-dir
4485* Skip::                        @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4486@end ifclear
4487
4488* Sleb128::			@code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4489@ifclear no-space-dir
4490* Space::                       @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4491@end ifclear
4492@ifset have-stabs
4493* Stab::                        @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4494@end ifset
4495
4496* String::                      @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4497* Struct::			@code{.struct @var{expression}}
4498@ifset ELF
4499* SubSection::                  @code{.subsection}
4500* Symver::                      @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4501@end ifset
4502
4503@ifset COFF
4504* Tag::                         @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4505@end ifset
4506
4507* Text::                        @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4508* Title::                       @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4509@ifset COFF-ELF
4510* Type::                        @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4511@end ifset
4512
4513* Uleb128::                     @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4514@ifset COFF
4515* Val::                         @code{.val @var{addr}}
4516@end ifset
4517
4518@ifset ELF
4519* Version::                     @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4520* VTableEntry::                 @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4521* VTableInherit::               @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4522@end ifset
4523
4524* Warning::			@code{.warning @var{string}}
4525* Weak::                        @code{.weak @var{names}}
4526* Weakref::                     @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4527* Word::                        @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4528@ifclear no-space-dir
4529* Zero::                        @code{.zero @var{size}}
4530@end ifclear
4531* Deprecated::                  Deprecated Directives
4532@end menu
4533
4534@node Abort
4535@section @code{.abort}
4536
4537@cindex @code{abort} directive
4538@cindex stopping the assembly
4539This directive stops the assembly immediately.  It is for
4540compatibility with other assemblers.  The original idea was that the
4541assembly language source would be piped into the assembler.  If the sender
4542of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4543quit also.  One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4544
4545@ifset COFF
4546@node ABORT (COFF)
4547@section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4548
4549@cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4550When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4551synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4552
4553@ifset BOUT
4554When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4555but ignores it.
4556@end ifset
4557@end ifset
4558
4559@node Align
4560@section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4561
4562@cindex padding the location counter
4563@cindex @code{align} directive
4564Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4565boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4566required, as described below.
4567
4568The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4569padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4570padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4571marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4572with no-op instructions.
4573
4574The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4575it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4576directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4577specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4578fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4579required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4580with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4581
4582The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4583For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4584s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4585alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4586the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4587is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.  For the tic54x, the
4588first expression is the alignment request in words.
4589
4590For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4591strongarm, it is the
4592number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4593advancement.  For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4594counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
4595multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4596
4597This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4598native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4599GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4600described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4601architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4602
4603@node Altmacro
4604@section @code{.altmacro}
4605Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4606
4607@ftable @code
4608@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4609One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available.  It is used to
4610generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4611replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion.  The
4612replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4613separate macro expansion.  @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4614define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4615
4616@item String delimiters
4617You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4618@code{"@var{string}"}:
4619
4620@table @code
4621@item '@var{string}'
4622You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4623
4624@item <@var{string}>
4625You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4626@end table
4627
4628@item single-character string escape
4629To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4630character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4631character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark).  For example, you can
4632write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4633
4634@item Expression results as strings
4635You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4636and use the result as a string.
4637@end ftable
4638
4639@node Ascii
4640@section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4641
4642@cindex @code{ascii} directive
4643@cindex string literals
4644@code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4645separated by commas.  It assembles each string (with no automatic
4646trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4647
4648@node Asciz
4649@section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4650
4651@cindex @code{asciz} directive
4652@cindex zero-terminated strings
4653@cindex null-terminated strings
4654@code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4655a zero byte.  The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4656
4657@node Balign
4658@section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4659
4660@cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4661@cindex @code{balign} directive
4662Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4663storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4664alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4665the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4666is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4667
4668The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4669padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4670padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4671marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4672with no-op instructions.
4673
4674The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4675it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4676directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4677specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4678fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4679required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4680with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4681
4682@cindex @code{balignw} directive
4683@cindex @code{balignl} directive
4684The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4685@code{.balign} directive.  The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4686pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4687fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.balignw
46884,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
4689filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4690the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4691undefined.
4692
4693@node Bundle directives
4694@section Bundle directives
4695@subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4696@cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4697@cindex bundle
4698@cindex instruction bundle
4699@cindex aligned instruction bundle
4700@code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4701bundle} mode.  In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4702into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}.  If the argument is zero, this mode is
4703disabled (which is the default state).  If the argument it not zero, it
4704gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4705@code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4706
4707For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4708certain aligned boundary.  A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4709instructions that starts on an aligned boundary.  For example, if
4710@var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4711chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle.  When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4712effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles.  If an
4713instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4714that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4715end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4716starts in the next bundle.  As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4717instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4718
4719@subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4720@cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4721@cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4722The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4723allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding.  These directives
4724are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4725aligned instruction bundle mode.  It's an error if they appear when
4726@code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4727directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4728
4729@cindex bundle-locked
4730For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4731appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4732instructions, all within the same bundle.  A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4733and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4734instruction sequence.  For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4735sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4736@code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction.  That is, the
4737entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4738boundary.  If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4739first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4740aligned bundle boundary.  It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4741bundle size.
4742
4743For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4744inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4745nested.  That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4746@code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4747matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4748same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4749
4750@node Byte
4751@section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4752
4753@cindex @code{byte} directive
4754@cindex integers, one byte
4755@code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4756Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4757
4758@node CFI directives
4759@section CFI directives
4760@subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4761@cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4762@code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4763should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4764If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4765if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4766To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}.  The default if this
4767directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4768
4769On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4770by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4771
4772Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4773which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4774
4775The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4776arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started.  Once CFI
4777generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4778redefine it will result in an error.
4779
4780@subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4781@cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4782@code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4783should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4784data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4785@code{.cfi_endproc}.
4786
4787Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4788it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4789
4790@subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4791@cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4792@code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4793unwind entry previously opened by
4794@code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4795
4796@subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4797@cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4798@code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4799@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4800should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4801argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4802a constant or a symbol name.  When using indirect encodings,
4803the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4804can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4805The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4806no personality routine.
4807
4808@subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4809@cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4810@code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4811defined in a compact unwinding format.
4812Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4813with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4814
4815@subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4816@cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4817@code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4818used for the current function.  These are emitted inline in the
4819@code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4820in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4821Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4822with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4823
4824@subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4825@code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4826@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4827should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4828argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4829or a symbol name.  The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4830meaning that no LSDA is present.
4831
4832@subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4833@code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4834switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4835Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4836Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4837with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4838
4839The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4840so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data.  The symbol
4841referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4842in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used.  The LSDA data is terminated
4843by a section directive.
4844
4845The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4846The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4847@code{.p2align} directive.
4848
4849@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4850@code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4851address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4852
4853@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4854@code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4855now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4856remains the same.
4857
4858@subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4859@code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4860remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4861absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4862CFA address.
4863
4864@subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4865Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4866value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4867
4868@subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4869Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4870CFA.
4871
4872@subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4873Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4874
4875@subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4876Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4877the current CFA register.  This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4878using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4879This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4880code it's annotating.
4881
4882@subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4883Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4884
4885@subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4886@code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4887same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4888instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4889
4890@subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4891From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4892
4893@subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4894Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4895i.e. no restoration needed.
4896
4897@subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4898@code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4899implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4900places them in the current row.  This is useful for situations where you have
4901multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4902flow of the program.  For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4903the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4904
4905@smallexample
4906        je label
4907        popq %rbx
4908        .cfi_restore %rbx
4909        popq %r12
4910        .cfi_restore %r12
4911        popq %rbp
4912        .cfi_restore %rbp
4913        .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4914        ret
4915label:
4916        /* Do something else */
4917@end smallexample
4918
4919Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4920to the instructions before @code{label}.  This means we'd have to add multiple
4921@code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4922locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4923@code{rbp}.  This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4924we can write:
4925
4926@smallexample
4927        je label
4928        popq %rbx
4929        .cfi_remember_state
4930        .cfi_restore %rbx
4931        popq %r12
4932        .cfi_restore %r12
4933        popq %rbp
4934        .cfi_restore %rbp
4935        .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4936        ret
4937label:
4938        .cfi_restore_state
4939        /* Do something else */
4940@end smallexample
4941
4942That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4943as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4944@code{.cfi} directives.
4945
4946@subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4947Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4948directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4949
4950@subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4951Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4952
4953@subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4954SPARC register window has been saved.
4955
4956@subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4957Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info.  One
4958might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4959opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4960
4961@subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4962The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}.  The value of @var{label}
4963will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4964description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4965
4966The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4967limited to the return address register.  Here, it can be useful to
4968mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4969by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4970or another register.
4971
4972@node Comm
4973@section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4974
4975@cindex @code{comm} directive
4976@cindex symbol, common
4977@code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}.  When linking, a
4978common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4979of the same name in another object file.  If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4980definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4981allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory.  @var{length} must be an
4982absolute expression.  If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4983the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4984using the largest size.
4985
4986@ifset COFF-ELF
4987When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4988an optional third argument.  This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4989specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4990that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4991as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4992boundary).  The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4993power of two.  If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4994common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol.  If no
4995alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4996largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4997maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4998is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4999@samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5000multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5001It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5002(@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5003@end ifset
5004
5005@ifset HPPA
5006The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
5007@samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5008@end ifset
5009
5010@node Data
5011@section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5012
5013@cindex @code{data} directive
5014@code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5015end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5016absolute expression).  If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5017to zero.
5018
5019@ifset COFF
5020@node Def
5021@section @code{.def @var{name}}
5022
5023@cindex @code{def} directive
5024@cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5025@cindex debugging COFF symbols
5026Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5027definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5028@ifset BOUT
5029
5030This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
5031format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
5032but ignored.
5033@end ifset
5034@end ifset
5035
5036@ifset aout-bout
5037@node Desc
5038@section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5039
5040@cindex @code{desc} directive
5041@cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5042@cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5043This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5044to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5045
5046@ifset COFF
5047The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5048configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5049object format.  For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5050it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5051@end ifset
5052@end ifset
5053
5054@ifset COFF
5055@node Dim
5056@section @code{.dim}
5057
5058@cindex @code{dim} directive
5059@cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5060@cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5061This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5062information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
5063@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5064@ifset BOUT
5065
5066@samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5067@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5068ignores it.
5069@end ifset
5070@end ifset
5071
5072@node Double
5073@section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5074
5075@cindex @code{double} directive
5076@cindex floating point numbers (double)
5077@code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
5078assembles floating point numbers.
5079@ifset GENERIC
5080The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5081@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5082@end ifset
5083@ifclear GENERIC
5084@ifset IEEEFLOAT
5085On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5086in @sc{ieee} format.
5087@end ifset
5088@end ifclear
5089
5090@node Eject
5091@section @code{.eject}
5092
5093@cindex @code{eject} directive
5094@cindex new page, in listings
5095@cindex page, in listings
5096@cindex listing control: new page
5097Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5098
5099@node Else
5100@section @code{.else}
5101
5102@cindex @code{else} directive
5103@code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5104assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It marks the beginning of a section
5105of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5106was false.
5107
5108@node Elseif
5109@section @code{.elseif}
5110
5111@cindex @code{elseif} directive
5112@code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5113assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It is shorthand for beginning a new
5114@code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5115
5116@node End
5117@section @code{.end}
5118
5119@cindex @code{end} directive
5120@code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file.  @command{@value{AS}} does not
5121process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5122
5123@ifset COFF
5124@node Endef
5125@section @code{.endef}
5126
5127@cindex @code{endef} directive
5128This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5129@code{.def}.
5130@ifset BOUT
5131
5132@samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
5133@command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
5134directive but ignores it.
5135@end ifset
5136@end ifset
5137
5138@node Endfunc
5139@section @code{.endfunc}
5140@cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5141@code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5142
5143@node Endif
5144@section @code{.endif}
5145
5146@cindex @code{endif} directive
5147@code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5148it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5149conditionally.  @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5150
5151@node Equ
5152@section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5153
5154@cindex @code{equ} directive
5155@cindex assigning values to symbols
5156@cindex symbols, assigning values to
5157This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5158It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5159
5160@ifset HPPA
5161The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5162@samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5163@end ifset
5164
5165@ifset Z80
5166The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5167@samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5168On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5169but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5170Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5171@end ifset
5172
5173@node Equiv
5174@section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5175@cindex @code{equiv} directive
5176The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5177the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined.  Note a
5178symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5179undefined.
5180
5181Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5182@smallexample
5183.ifdef SYM
5184.err
5185.endif
5186.equ SYM,VAL
5187@end smallexample
5188plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5189
5190@node Eqv
5191@section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5192@cindex @code{eqv} directive
5193The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5194evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately.  Instead each time
5195the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5196value is taken.
5197
5198@node Err
5199@section @code{.err}
5200@cindex @code{err} directive
5201If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5202message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5203object file.  This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5204
5205@node Error
5206@section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5207@cindex error directive
5208
5209Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5210string that will be emitted as the error message.  If you don't specify the
5211message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5212@xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5213
5214@smallexample
5215 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5216@end smallexample
5217
5218@node Exitm
5219@section @code{.exitm}
5220Exit early from the current macro definition.  @xref{Macro}.
5221
5222@node Extern
5223@section @code{.extern}
5224
5225@cindex @code{extern} directive
5226@code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5227with other assemblers---but it is ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} treats
5228all undefined symbols as external.
5229
5230@node Fail
5231@section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5232
5233@cindex @code{fail} directive
5234Generates an error or a warning.  If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5235or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message.  If the value is less
5236than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message.  The message will
5237include the value of @var{expression}.  This can occasionally be useful inside
5238complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5239
5240@node File
5241@section @code{.file}
5242@cindex @code{file} directive
5243
5244@ifclear no-file-dir
5245There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive.  Targets
5246that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5247@code{.file}.  Other targets use the default version.
5248
5249@subheading Default Version
5250
5251@cindex logical file name
5252@cindex file name, logical
5253This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5254are about to start a new logical file.  The syntax is:
5255
5256@smallexample
5257.file @var{string}
5258@end smallexample
5259
5260@var{string} is the new file name.  In general, the filename is
5261recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5262to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}.  This
5263statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5264old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5265
5266@subheading DWARF2 Version
5267@end ifclear
5268
5269When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5270to the @code{.debug_line} file name table.  The syntax is:
5271
5272@smallexample
5273.file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5274@end smallexample
5275
5276The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5277index of the entry in the table.  The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5278literal.
5279
5280The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5281table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5282information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5283entries will have.
5284
5285@node Fill
5286@section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5287
5288@cindex @code{fill} directive
5289@cindex writing patterns in memory
5290@cindex patterns, writing in memory
5291@var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5292This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes.  @var{Repeat}
5293may be zero or more.  @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5294more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5295other people's assemblers.  The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5296is taken from an 8-byte number.  The highest order 4 bytes are
5297zero.  The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5298byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5299Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5300@var{size} bytes of this number.  Again, this bizarre behavior is
5301compatible with other people's assemblers.
5302
5303@var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5304If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5305assumed zero.  If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5306@var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5307
5308@node Float
5309@section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5310
5311@cindex floating point numbers (single)
5312@cindex @code{float} directive
5313This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
5314has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5315@ifset GENERIC
5316The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5317@command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5318@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5319@end ifset
5320@ifclear GENERIC
5321@ifset IEEEFLOAT
5322On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5323in @sc{ieee} format.
5324@end ifset
5325@end ifclear
5326
5327@node Func
5328@section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5329@cindex @code{func} directive
5330@code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5331is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5332Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5333@var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5334prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5335@samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5336All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5337The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5338
5339@node Global
5340@section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5341
5342@cindex @code{global} directive
5343@cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5344@code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}.  If you define
5345@var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5346other partial programs that are linked with it.  Otherwise,
5347@var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5348from another file linked into the same program.
5349
5350Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5351compatibility with other assemblers.
5352
5353@ifset HPPA
5354On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5355partial programs.  You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5356@xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5357@end ifset
5358
5359@ifset ELF
5360@node Gnu_attribute
5361@section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5362Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file.  @xref{Object Attributes}.
5363
5364@node Hidden
5365@section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5366
5367@cindex @code{hidden} directive
5368@cindex visibility
5369This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
5370@code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5371@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5372
5373This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5374their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
5375@code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5376Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5377@end ifset
5378
5379@node hword
5380@section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5381
5382@cindex @code{hword} directive
5383@cindex integers, 16-bit
5384@cindex numbers, 16-bit
5385@cindex sixteen bit integers
5386This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5387a 16 bit number for each.
5388
5389@ifset GENERIC
5390This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5391architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5392@end ifset
5393@ifclear GENERIC
5394@ifset W32
5395This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5396@end ifset
5397@ifset W16
5398This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5399@end ifset
5400@end ifclear
5401
5402@node Ident
5403@section @code{.ident}
5404
5405@cindex @code{ident} directive
5406
5407This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files.  The
5408behavior of this directive varies depending on the target.  When using the
5409a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5410source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5411for it.  When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5412@code{.rdata} section, depending on the target.  When using ELF, comments are
5413emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5414
5415@node If
5416@section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5417
5418@cindex conditional assembly
5419@cindex @code{if} directive
5420@code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5421considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5422(which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero.  The end of
5423the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5424(@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5425alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5426If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5427nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5428
5429The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5430@table @code
5431@cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5432@item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5433Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5434has been defined.  Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5435is considered to be undefined.
5436
5437@cindex @code{ifb} directive
5438@item .ifb @var{text}
5439Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5440
5441@cindex @code{ifc} directive
5442@item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5443Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same.  The
5444strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes.  If they are not quoted,
5445the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5446end of the line.  Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted.  The
5447string comparison is case sensitive.
5448
5449@cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5450@item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5451Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5452
5453@cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5454@item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5455Another form of @code{.ifc}.  The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5456
5457@cindex @code{ifge} directive
5458@item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5459Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5460equal to zero.
5461
5462@cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5463@item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5464Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5465
5466@cindex @code{ifle} directive
5467@item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5468Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5469to zero.
5470
5471@cindex @code{iflt} directive
5472@item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5473Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5474
5475@cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5476@item .ifnb @var{text}
5477Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5478following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5479
5480@cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5481@item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5482Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5483following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5484
5485@cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5486@cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5487@item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5488@itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5489Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5490has not been defined.  Both spelling variants are equivalent.  Note a symbol
5491which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5492
5493@cindex @code{ifne} directive
5494@item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5495Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5496(in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5497
5498@cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5499@item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5500Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5501following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5502@end table
5503
5504@node Incbin
5505@section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5506
5507@cindex @code{incbin} directive
5508@cindex binary files, including
5509The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5510location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5511option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
5512around @var{file}.
5513
5514The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5515@var{file}.  The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5516read.  Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5517responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5518after the @code{incbin} directive.
5519
5520@node Include
5521@section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5522
5523@cindex @code{include} directive
5524@cindex supporting files, including
5525@cindex files, including
5526This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5527points in your source program.  The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5528if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5529included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues.  You
5530can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5531(@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
5532around @var{file}.
5533
5534@node Int
5535@section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5536
5537@cindex @code{int} directive
5538@cindex integers, 32-bit
5539Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5540For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5541expression.  The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5542of target the assembly is for.
5543
5544@ifclear GENERIC
5545@ifset H8
5546On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5547integers.  On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
554832-bit integers.
5549@end ifset
5550@end ifclear
5551
5552@ifset ELF
5553@node Internal
5554@section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5555
5556@cindex @code{internal} directive
5557@cindex visibility
5558This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
5559@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5560@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5561
5562This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5563their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
5564@code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5565(i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5566processing must also be performed upon the  symbols as well.
5567@end ifset
5568
5569@node Irp
5570@section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5571
5572@cindex @code{irp} directive
5573Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5574The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5575terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5576set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled.  If no
5577@var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5578@var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5579sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5580
5581For example, assembling
5582
5583@example
5584        .irp    param,1,2,3
5585        move    d\param,sp@@-
5586        .endr
5587@end example
5588
5589is equivalent to assembling
5590
5591@example
5592        move    d1,sp@@-
5593        move    d2,sp@@-
5594        move    d3,sp@@-
5595@end example
5596
5597For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5598
5599@node Irpc
5600@section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5601
5602@cindex @code{irpc} directive
5603Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5604The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5605terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each character in @var{value},
5606@var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5607assembled.  If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5608assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to
5609@var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5610
5611For example, assembling
5612
5613@example
5614        .irpc    param,123
5615        move    d\param,sp@@-
5616        .endr
5617@end example
5618
5619is equivalent to assembling
5620
5621@example
5622        move    d1,sp@@-
5623        move    d2,sp@@-
5624        move    d3,sp@@-
5625@end example
5626
5627For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5628at @xref{Macro}.
5629
5630@node Lcomm
5631@section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5632
5633@cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5634@cindex local common symbols
5635@cindex symbols, local common
5636Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5637denoted by @var{symbol}.  The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5638those of the new local common.  The addresses are allocated in the bss
5639section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed.  @var{Symbol}
5640is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5641not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5642
5643@ifset GENERIC
5644Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}.  This
5645argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5646@end ifset
5647
5648@ifset HPPA
5649The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
5650@samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5651@end ifset
5652
5653@node Lflags
5654@section @code{.lflags}
5655
5656@cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5657@command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5658assemblers, but ignores it.
5659
5660@ifclear no-line-dir
5661@node Line
5662@section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5663
5664@cindex @code{line} directive
5665@cindex logical line number
5666@ifset aout-bout
5667Change the logical line number.  @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5668expression.  The next line has that logical line number.  Therefore any other
5669statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5670reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.  One day
5671@command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5672for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5673@end ifset
5674
5675Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5676@code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5677when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5678were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5679@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5680
5681Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5682used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5683debugging.
5684@end ifclear
5685
5686@node Linkonce
5687@section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5688@cindex COMDAT
5689@cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5690@cindex common sections
5691Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5692This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5693but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5694The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5695Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5696unique.
5697
5698This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5699writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5700Executable format used on Windows NT.
5701
5702The @var{type} argument is optional.  If specified, it must be one of the
5703following strings.  For example:
5704@smallexample
5705.linkonce same_size
5706@end smallexample
5707Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5708
5709@table @code
5710@item discard
5711Silently discard duplicate sections.  This is the default.
5712
5713@item one_only
5714Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5715
5716@item same_size
5717Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5718
5719@item same_contents
5720Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5721@end table
5722
5723@node List
5724@section @code{.list}
5725
5726@cindex @code{list} directive
5727@cindex listing control, turning on
5728Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5729not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5730internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5731counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5732generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5733
5734By default, listings are disabled.  When you enable them (with the
5735@samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5736the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5737
5738@node Ln
5739@section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5740
5741@cindex @code{ln} directive
5742@ifclear no-line-dir
5743@samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5744@end ifclear
5745@ifset no-line-dir
5746Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number.  @var{line-number}
5747must be an absolute expression.  The next line has that logical
5748line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5749statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5750line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5751@ifset BOUT
5752
5753This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5754configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5755output format.
5756@end ifset
5757@end ifset
5758
5759@node Loc
5760@section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5761@cindex @code{loc} directive
5762When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5763the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5764number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5765instruction.  The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5766arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5767the row is added.
5768
5769The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5770
5771@table @code
5772@item basic_block
5773This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5774@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5775
5776@item prologue_end
5777This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5778@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5779
5780@item epilogue_begin
5781This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5782@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5783
5784@item is_stmt @var{value}
5785This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5786@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5787either 0 or 1.
5788
5789@item isa @var{value}
5790This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5791state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5792
5793@item discriminator @var{value}
5794This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5795state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5796
5797@end table
5798
5799@node Loc_mark_labels
5800@section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5801@cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5802When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5803the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5804to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5805register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5806The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5807this function respectively.
5808
5809@ifset ELF
5810@node Local
5811@section @code{.local @var{names}}
5812
5813@cindex @code{local} directive
5814This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5815the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5816will not be externally visible.  If the symbols do not already exist,
5817they will be created.
5818
5819For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5820accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5821the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5822(@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5823@end ifset
5824
5825@node Long
5826@section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5827
5828@cindex @code{long} directive
5829@code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}.  @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5830
5831@ignore
5832@c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5833@c what it really ought to do
5834@node Lsym
5835@section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5836
5837@cindex @code{lsym} directive
5838@cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5839@code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5840the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5841rest of the assembly.  This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5842the same as the expression value:
5843@smallexample
5844@var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5845@var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5846@var{value} = @var{expression}
5847@end smallexample
5848@noindent
5849The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5850@end ignore
5851
5852@node Macro
5853@section @code{.macro}
5854
5855@cindex macros
5856The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5857generate assembly output.  For example, this definition specifies a macro
5858@code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5859
5860@example
5861        .macro  sum from=0, to=5
5862        .long   \from
5863        .if     \to-\from
5864        sum     "(\from+1)",\to
5865        .endif
5866        .endm
5867@end example
5868
5869@noindent
5870With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5871
5872@example
5873        .long   0
5874        .long   1
5875        .long   2
5876        .long   3
5877        .long   4
5878        .long   5
5879@end example
5880
5881@ftable @code
5882@item .macro @var{macname}
5883@itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5884@cindex @code{macro} directive
5885Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}.  If your macro
5886definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5887separated by commas or spaces.  You can qualify the macro argument to
5888indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5889@samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5890(through @samp{:@code{vararg}}).  You can supply a default value for any
5891macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}.  You
5892cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5893subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5894definitions.  For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5895
5896@table @code
5897@item .macro comm
5898Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5899arguments.
5900
5901@item  .macro plus1 p, p1
5902@itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5903Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5904which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5905@samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5906
5907@item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5908Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5909arguments.  The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5910After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5911@samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5912@var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5913,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5914@samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5915
5916@item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5917Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5918arguments.  The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5919not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5920will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5921
5922When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5923position, or by keyword.  For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5924@samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5925
5926@end table
5927
5928Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5929as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5930occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5931characters when they occur in a special position.  For example, if the colon
5932(@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5933architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5934character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5935replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5936construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5937identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution.  So for example
5938this macro definition:
5939
5940@example
5941	.macro label l
5942\l:
5943	.endm
5944@end example
5945
5946might not work as expected.  Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5947called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5948assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5949identifier.
5950
5951Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5952which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names).  So
5953for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5954length specifier like this:
5955
5956@example
5957	.macro opcode base length
5958        \base.\length
5959	.endm
5960@end example
5961
5962and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5963instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5964interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5965
5966There are several possible ways around this problem:
5967
5968@table @code
5969@item Insert white space
5970If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5971solution.  eg:
5972
5973@example
5974	.macro label l
5975\l :
5976	.endm
5977@end example
5978
5979@item Use @samp{\()}
5980The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5981the following text.  eg:
5982
5983@example
5984	.macro opcode base length
5985        \base\().\length
5986	.endm
5987@end example
5988
5989@item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5990In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5991used as a separator.  eg:
5992
5993@example
5994	.altmacro
5995	.macro label l
5996l&:
5997	.endm
5998@end example
5999@end table
6000
6001Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6002also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6003and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6004
6005@item .endm
6006@cindex @code{endm} directive
6007Mark the end of a macro definition.
6008
6009@item .exitm
6010@cindex @code{exitm} directive
6011Exit early from the current macro definition.
6012
6013@cindex number of macros executed
6014@cindex macros, count executed
6015@item \@@
6016@command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6017executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6018output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6019
6020@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6021@emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6022macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6023@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6024@end ftable
6025
6026@node MRI
6027@section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6028
6029@cindex @code{mri} directive
6030@cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6031If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode.  If
6032@var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode.  This change
6033affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6034of the file.  @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6035
6036@node Noaltmacro
6037@section @code{.noaltmacro}
6038Disable alternate macro mode.  @xref{Altmacro}.
6039
6040@node Nolist
6041@section @code{.nolist}
6042
6043@cindex @code{nolist} directive
6044@cindex listing control, turning off
6045Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6046not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
6047internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
6048counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
6049generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6050
6051@node Octa
6052@section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6053
6054@c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others?  Or warn?
6055@cindex @code{octa} directive
6056@cindex integer, 16-byte
6057@cindex sixteen byte integer
6058This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For each
6059bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6060
6061The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6062hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6063
6064@node Offset
6065@section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6066
6067@cindex @code{offset} directive
6068Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section.  @var{loc} must
6069be an absolute expression.  This directive may be useful for defining
6070symbols with absolute values.  Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6071directive.
6072
6073@node Org
6074@section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6075
6076@cindex @code{org} directive
6077@cindex location counter, advancing
6078@cindex advancing location counter
6079@cindex current address, advancing
6080Advance the location counter of the current section to
6081@var{new-lc}.  @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6082expression with the same section as the current subsection.  That is,
6083you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6084wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored.  To be compatible
6085with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6086@command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6087is the same as the current subsection.
6088
6089@code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6090unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6091backwards.
6092
6093@c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6094@c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6095@c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6096Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6097may not be undefined.  If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6098a chance to share your improved assembler.
6099
6100Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6101to the start of the subsection.  This is compatible with other
6102people's assemblers.
6103
6104When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6105intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6106absolute expression.  If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6107@var{fill} defaults to zero.
6108
6109@node P2align
6110@section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6111
6112@cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6113@cindex @code{p2align} directive
6114Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6115storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6116number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6117advancement.  For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6118counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
6119multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6120
6121The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6122padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
6123padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
6124marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6125with no-op instructions.
6126
6127The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
6128it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6129directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6130specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
6131fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6132required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6133with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6134
6135@cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6136@cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6137The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6138@code{.p2align} directive.  The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6139pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6140fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.p2alignw
61412,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
6142filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6143the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6144undefined.
6145
6146@ifset ELF
6147@node PopSection
6148@section @code{.popsection}
6149
6150@cindex @code{popsection} directive
6151@cindex Section Stack
6152This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6153@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6154@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6155(@pxref{Previous}).
6156
6157This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6158section (and subsection) on the section stack.  This section is popped off the
6159stack.
6160@end ifset
6161
6162@ifset ELF
6163@node Previous
6164@section @code{.previous}
6165
6166@cindex @code{previous} directive
6167@cindex Section Stack
6168This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6169@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6170@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6171(@pxref{PopSection}).
6172
6173This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6174referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one.  Multiple
6175@code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6176subsections).  For example:
6177
6178@smallexample
6179.section A
6180 .subsection 1
6181  .word 0x1234
6182 .subsection 2
6183  .word 0x5678
6184.previous
6185 .word 0x9abc
6186@end smallexample
6187
6188Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6189section A.  Whilst:
6190
6191@smallexample
6192.section A
6193.subsection 1
6194  # Now in section A subsection 1
6195  .word 0x1234
6196.section B
6197.subsection 0
6198  # Now in section B subsection 0
6199  .word 0x5678
6200.subsection 1
6201  # Now in section B subsection 1
6202  .word 0x9abc
6203.previous
6204  # Now in section B subsection 0
6205  .word 0xdef0
6206@end smallexample
6207
6208Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6209section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6210
6211In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6212the top section on the section stack.
6213@end ifset
6214
6215@node Print
6216@section @code{.print @var{string}}
6217
6218@cindex @code{print} directive
6219@command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6220assembly.  You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6221
6222@ifset ELF
6223@node Protected
6224@section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6225
6226@cindex @code{protected} directive
6227@cindex visibility
6228This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
6229@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6230
6231This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6232their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
6233@code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6234components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6235component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6236this.
6237@end ifset
6238
6239@node Psize
6240@section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6241
6242@cindex @code{psize} directive
6243@cindex listing control: paper size
6244@cindex paper size, for listings
6245Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6246number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6247
6248If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6249of 60.  You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6250default width is 200 columns.
6251
6252@command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6253lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6254@code{.eject}).
6255
6256If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6257those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6258
6259@node Purgem
6260@section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6261
6262@cindex @code{purgem} directive
6263Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6264expanded.  @xref{Macro}.
6265
6266@ifset ELF
6267@node PushSection
6268@section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6269
6270@cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6271@cindex Section Stack
6272This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6273@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6274@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6275(@pxref{Previous}).
6276
6277This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6278top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6279subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6280@code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6281as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6282@end ifset
6283
6284@node Quad
6285@section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6286
6287@cindex @code{quad} directive
6288@code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For
6289each bignum, it emits
6290@ifclear bignum-16
6291an 8-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6292warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6293@cindex eight-byte integer
6294@cindex integer, 8-byte
6295
6296The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6297hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6298@end ifclear
6299@ifset bignum-16
6300a 16-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6301warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6302@cindex sixteen-byte integer
6303@cindex integer, 16-byte
6304@end ifset
6305
6306@node Reloc
6307@section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6308
6309@cindex @code{reloc} directive
6310Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6311@var{expression}.  If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6312the current section.  If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6313symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6314@var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6315absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend.  e.g. ELF REL
6316targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6317relocation.  This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6318section.
6319
6320@node Rept
6321@section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6322
6323@cindex @code{rept} directive
6324Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6325@code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6326
6327For example, assembling
6328
6329@example
6330        .rept   3
6331        .long   0
6332        .endr
6333@end example
6334
6335is equivalent to assembling
6336
6337@example
6338        .long   0
6339        .long   0
6340        .long   0
6341@end example
6342
6343@node Sbttl
6344@section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6345
6346@cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6347@cindex subtitles for listings
6348@cindex listing control: subtitle
6349Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6350title line) when generating assembly listings.
6351
6352This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6353it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6354
6355@ifset COFF
6356@node Scl
6357@section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6358
6359@cindex @code{scl} directive
6360@cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6361@cindex COFF symbol storage class
6362Set the storage-class value for a symbol.  This directive may only be
6363used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.  Storage class may flag
6364whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6365symbolic debugging information.
6366@ifset BOUT
6367
6368The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6369configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6370accepts this directive but ignores it.
6371@end ifset
6372@end ifset
6373
6374@ifset COFF-ELF
6375@node Section
6376@section @code{.section @var{name}}
6377
6378@cindex named section
6379Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6380named @var{name}.
6381
6382This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6383named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6384with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6385
6386@ifset COFF
6387@ifset ELF
6388@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6389@subheading COFF Version
6390@end ifset
6391
6392@cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6393For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6394ways:
6395
6396@smallexample
6397.section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6398.section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6399@end smallexample
6400
6401If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6402section.  Each flag is a single character.  The following flags are recognized:
6403
6404@table @code
6405@item b
6406bss section (uninitialized data)
6407@item n
6408section is not loaded
6409@item w
6410writable section
6411@item d
6412data section
6413@item e
6414exclude section from linking
6415@item r
6416read-only section
6417@item x
6418executable section
6419@item s
6420shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6421@item a
6422ignored.  (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6423@item y
6424section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6425@item 0-9
6426single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6427@end table
6428
6429If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
6430the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6431loaded and writable.  Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6432from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6433will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6434
6435If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6436taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6437@end ifset
6438
6439@ifset ELF
6440@ifset COFF
6441@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6442@subheading ELF Version
6443@end ifset
6444
6445@cindex Section Stack
6446This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6447@code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6448(@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6449@code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6450
6451@cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6452For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6453
6454@smallexample
6455.section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6456@end smallexample
6457
6458@anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6459@kindex --sectname-subst
6460@cindex section name substitution
6461If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6462argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6463at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6464
6465@smallexample
6466.macro exception_code
6467.section %S.exception
6468[exception code here]
6469.previous
6470.endm
6471
6472.text
6473[code]
6474exception_code
6475[...]
6476
6477.section .init
6478[init code]
6479exception_code
6480[...]
6481@end smallexample
6482
6483The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6484@code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6485This is useful e.g. to discriminate between anciliary sections that are
6486tied to setup code to be discarded after use from anciliary sections that
6487need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6488macros just for that purpose.
6489
6490The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6491combination of the following characters:
6492
6493@table @code
6494@item a
6495section is allocatable
6496@item e
6497section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6498@item w
6499section is writable
6500@item x
6501section is executable
6502@item M
6503section is mergeable
6504@item S
6505section contains zero terminated strings
6506@item G
6507section is a member of a section group
6508@item T
6509section is used for thread-local-storage
6510@item ?
6511section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6512@item @code{<number>}
6513a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6514field.  Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6515also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6516resulting value.
6517@item @code{<target specific>}
6518some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6519@end table
6520
6521Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed.  There are
6522a few exceptions to this rule however.  Processor and application specific
6523flags can be added to an already defined section.  The @code{.interp},
6524@code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6525(@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6526section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6527
6528The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6529
6530@table @code
6531@item @@progbits
6532section contains data
6533@item @@nobits
6534section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6535@item @@note
6536section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6537@item @@init_array
6538section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6539@item @@fini_array
6540section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6541@item @@preinit_array
6542section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6543@item @@@code{<number>}
6544a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6545@item @@@code{<target specific>}
6546some targets extend this list with their own types
6547@end table
6548
6549Many targets only support the first three section types.  The type may be
6550enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6551
6552Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6553ARM) then another character is used instead.  For example the ARM port uses the
6554@code{%} character.
6555
6556Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6557special and have fixed types.  Any attempt to declare them with a different
6558type will generate an error from the assembler.
6559
6560If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6561be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6562
6563@smallexample
6564.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6565@end smallexample
6566
6567Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6568constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6569@code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6570@var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6571the same name, same entity size and same flags.  @var{entsize} must be an
6572absolute expression.  For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6573which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate.  Thus
6574@code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"};  A reference to the first
6575@code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6576
6577If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6578be present along with an additional field like this:
6579
6580@smallexample
6581.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6582@end smallexample
6583
6584The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6585particular section belongs.  The optional linkage field can contain:
6586
6587@table @code
6588@item comdat
6589indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6590@item .gnu.linkonce
6591an alias for comdat
6592@end table
6593
6594Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6595the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6596
6597@smallexample
6598.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6599@end smallexample
6600
6601If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6602@code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6603present.  Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6604this directive.  If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6605@code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6606If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6607
6608If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
6609the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6610none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6611executable.  The section will contain data.
6612
6613For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6614directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6615
6616@smallexample
6617.section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6618@end smallexample
6619
6620Note that the section name is quoted.  There may be a sequence of comma
6621separated flags:
6622
6623@table @code
6624@item #alloc
6625section is allocatable
6626@item #write
6627section is writable
6628@item #execinstr
6629section is executable
6630@item #exclude
6631section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6632@item #tls
6633section is used for thread local storage
6634@end table
6635
6636This directive replaces the current section and subsection.  See the
6637contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6638some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6639work.
6640@end ifset
6641@end ifset
6642
6643@node Set
6644@section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6645
6646@cindex @code{set} directive
6647@cindex symbol value, setting
6648Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.  This
6649changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6650@var{expression}.  If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6651flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6652
6653You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6654values given to the symbol are constants.  Values that are based on expressions
6655involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6656being done once per assembly.  This is because those targets do not set the
6657addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6658final link is performed.  This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6659the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6660different symbols.
6661
6662If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6663file is the last value stored into it.
6664
6665@ifset Z80
6666On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6667@samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6668@end ifset
6669
6670@node Short
6671@section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6672
6673@cindex @code{short} directive
6674@ifset GENERIC
6675@code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6676@xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6677
6678In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6679numbers of different lengths.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6680@end ifset
6681@ifclear GENERIC
6682@ifset W16
6683@code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6684@end ifset
6685@ifset W32
6686This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6687a 16 bit number for each.
6688@end ifset
6689@end ifclear
6690
6691@node Single
6692@section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6693
6694@cindex @code{single} directive
6695@cindex floating point numbers (single)
6696This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
6697has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6698@ifset GENERIC
6699The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6700@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6701@end ifset
6702@ifclear GENERIC
6703@ifset IEEEFLOAT
6704On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6705numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6706@end ifset
6707@end ifclear
6708
6709@ifset COFF-ELF
6710@node Size
6711@section @code{.size}
6712
6713This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6714
6715@ifset COFF
6716@ifset ELF
6717@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6718@subheading COFF Version
6719@end ifset
6720
6721@cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6722For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6723@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
6724
6725@smallexample
6726.size @var{expression}
6727@end smallexample
6728
6729@ifset BOUT
6730@samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6731@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6732ignores it.
6733@end ifset
6734@end ifset
6735
6736@ifset ELF
6737@ifset COFF
6738@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6739@subheading ELF Version
6740@end ifset
6741
6742@cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6743For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6744
6745@smallexample
6746.size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6747@end smallexample
6748
6749This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6750The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6751arithmetic.  This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6752symbols.
6753@end ifset
6754@end ifset
6755
6756@ifclear no-space-dir
6757@node Skip
6758@section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6759
6760@cindex @code{skip} directive
6761@cindex filling memory
6762This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6763@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma and
6764@var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same as
6765@samp{.space}.
6766@end ifclear
6767
6768@node Sleb128
6769@section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6770
6771@cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6772@var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.''  This is a
6773compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6774symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6775
6776@ifclear no-space-dir
6777@node Space
6778@section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6779
6780@cindex @code{space} directive
6781@cindex filling memory
6782This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6783@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma
6784and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same
6785as @samp{.skip}.
6786
6787@ifset HPPA
6788@quotation
6789@emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6790targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute.  See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6791Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6792@code{.space} directive.  @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6793for a summary.
6794@end quotation
6795@end ifset
6796@end ifclear
6797
6798@ifset have-stabs
6799@node Stab
6800@section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6801
6802@cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6803@cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6804There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6805All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6806The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6807cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6808Up to five fields are required:
6809
6810@table @var
6811@item string
6812This is the symbol's name.  It may contain any character except
6813@samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names.  Some
6814debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6815using this field.
6816
6817@item type
6818An absolute expression.  The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6819this expression.  Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6820and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6821
6822@item other
6823An absolute expression.  The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6824low 8 bits of this expression.
6825
6826@item desc
6827An absolute expression.  The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6828bits of this expression.
6829
6830@item value
6831An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6832@end table
6833
6834If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6835or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6836you get a half-formed symbol in your object file.  This is
6837compatible with earlier assemblers!
6838
6839@table @code
6840@cindex @code{stabd} directive
6841@item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6842
6843The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6844It is a null pointer, for compatibility.  Older assemblers used a
6845null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6846strings.
6847
6848The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6849relocatably.  When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6850is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6851assembled.
6852
6853@cindex @code{stabn} directive
6854@item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6855The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6856
6857@cindex @code{stabs} directive
6858@item .stabs @var{string} ,  @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6859All five fields are specified.
6860@end table
6861@end ifset
6862@c end     have-stabs
6863
6864@node String
6865@section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6866"@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6867
6868@cindex string, copying to object file
6869@cindex string8, copying to object file
6870@cindex string16, copying to object file
6871@cindex string32, copying to object file
6872@cindex string64, copying to object file
6873@cindex @code{string} directive
6874@cindex @code{string8} directive
6875@cindex @code{string16} directive
6876@cindex @code{string32} directive
6877@cindex @code{string64} directive
6878
6879Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file.  You may specify more than
6880one string to copy, separated by commas.  Unless otherwise specified for a
6881particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6882You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6883
6884The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6885the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6886copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively.  The expanded characters
6887are stored in target endianness byte order.
6888
6889Example:
6890@smallexample
6891	.string32 "BYE"
6892expands to:
6893	.string   "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0"  /* On little endian targets.  */
6894	.string   "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E"  /* On big endian targets.  */
6895@end smallexample
6896
6897
6898@node Struct
6899@section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6900
6901@cindex @code{struct} directive
6902Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6903which must be an absolute expression.  You might use this as follows:
6904@smallexample
6905        .struct 0
6906field1:
6907        .struct field1 + 4
6908field2:
6909        .struct field2 + 4
6910field3:
6911@end smallexample
6912This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6913@code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6914value 8.  Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6915use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6916before further assembly.
6917
6918@ifset ELF
6919@node SubSection
6920@section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6921
6922@cindex @code{subsection} directive
6923@cindex Section Stack
6924This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6925@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6926@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6927(@pxref{Previous}).
6928
6929This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}.  The current
6930section is not changed.  The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6931in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6932@end ifset
6933
6934@ifset ELF
6935@node Symver
6936@section @code{.symver}
6937@cindex @code{symver} directive
6938@cindex symbol versioning
6939@cindex versions of symbols
6940Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6941within a source file.  This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6942typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6943There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6944into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6945shared library.
6946
6947For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6948@smallexample
6949.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6950@end smallexample
6951If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6952being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6953alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6954just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6955permitted in symbol names.  The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6956of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced.  The name @var{name}
6957itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6958have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6959file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6960function is being mentioned.  The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6961the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6962building a shared library.  If you are attempting to override a versioned
6963symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6964nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6965
6966If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6967references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}.  If no
6968reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6969symbol table.
6970
6971Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6972@smallexample
6973.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6974@end smallexample
6975In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6976the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6977difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6978references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6979
6980The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6981@smallexample
6982.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6983@end smallexample
6984When @var{name} is not defined within the
6985file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6986@var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6987name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6988@end ifset
6989
6990@ifset COFF
6991@node Tag
6992@section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6993
6994@cindex COFF structure debugging
6995@cindex structure debugging, COFF
6996@cindex @code{tag} directive
6997This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6998information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
6999@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  Tags are used to link structure
7000definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7001@ifset BOUT
7002
7003@samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
7004@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
7005ignores it.
7006@end ifset
7007@end ifset
7008
7009@node Text
7010@section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7011
7012@cindex @code{text} directive
7013Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7014the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7015expression.  If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7016is used.
7017
7018@node Title
7019@section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7020
7021@cindex @code{title} directive
7022@cindex listing control: title line
7023Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7024source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7025
7026This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7027it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7028
7029@ifset COFF-ELF
7030@node Type
7031@section @code{.type}
7032
7033This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7034
7035@ifset COFF
7036@ifset ELF
7037@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7038@subheading COFF Version
7039@end ifset
7040
7041@cindex COFF symbol type
7042@cindex symbol type, COFF
7043@cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7044For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7045@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
7046
7047@smallexample
7048.type @var{int}
7049@end smallexample
7050
7051This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7052entry.
7053
7054@ifset BOUT
7055@samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
7056@command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
7057directive but ignores it.
7058@end ifset
7059@end ifset
7060
7061@ifset ELF
7062@ifset COFF
7063@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7064@subheading ELF Version
7065@end ifset
7066
7067@cindex ELF symbol type
7068@cindex symbol type, ELF
7069@cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7070For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7071
7072@smallexample
7073.type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7074@end smallexample
7075
7076This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7077function symbol or an object symbol.  There are five different syntaxes
7078supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7079compatibility with various other assemblers.
7080
7081Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7082@samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7083below do not work on all architectures.  The first variant will be accepted by
7084the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7085maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7086assemblers.
7087
7088The syntaxes supported are:
7089
7090@smallexample
7091  .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7092  .type <name>,#<type>
7093  .type <name>,@@<type>
7094  .type <name>,%<type>
7095  .type <name>,"<type>"
7096@end smallexample
7097
7098The types supported are:
7099
7100@table @gcctabopt
7101@item STT_FUNC
7102@itemx function
7103Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7104
7105@item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7106@itemx gnu_indirect_function
7107Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7108processing.  (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7109
7110@item STT_OBJECT
7111@itemx object
7112Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7113
7114@item STT_TLS
7115@itemx tls_object
7116Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
7117
7118@item STT_COMMON
7119@itemx common
7120Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7121
7122@item STT_NOTYPE
7123@itemx notype
7124Does not mark the symbol in any way.  It is supported just for completeness.
7125
7126@item gnu_unique_object
7127Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object.  The dynamic linker
7128will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7129name and type in use.  (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7130systems).
7131
7132@end table
7133
7134Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7135
7136@end ifset
7137@end ifset
7138
7139@node Uleb128
7140@section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7141
7142@cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7143@var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.''  This is a
7144compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7145symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7146
7147@ifset COFF
7148@node Val
7149@section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7150
7151@cindex @code{val} directive
7152@cindex COFF value attribute
7153@cindex value attribute, COFF
7154This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7155records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7156entry.
7157@ifset BOUT
7158
7159@samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
7160configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
7161@end ifset
7162@end ifset
7163
7164@ifset ELF
7165@node Version
7166@section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7167
7168@cindex @code{version} directive
7169This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7170formatted note of type NT_VERSION.  The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7171@end ifset
7172
7173@ifset ELF
7174@node VTableEntry
7175@section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7176
7177@cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7178This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7179@code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7180
7181@node VTableInherit
7182@section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7183
7184@cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7185This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7186@code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7187parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol.  As a special case the
7188parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7189@end ifset
7190
7191@node Warning
7192@section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7193@cindex warning directive
7194Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7195(@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7196
7197@node Weak
7198@section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7199
7200@cindex @code{weak} directive
7201This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7202@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7203
7204On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension.  This
7205directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7206@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7207
7208On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7209When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7210alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7211
7212@node Weakref
7213@section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7214
7215@cindex @code{weakref} directive
7216This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7217be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7218If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7219will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7220symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7221
7222The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7223assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7224symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7225resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7226had the references to the alias removed.
7227
7228The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7229within the assembler.
7230
7231@node Word
7232@section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7233
7234@cindex @code{word} directive
7235This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7236separated by commas.
7237@ifclear GENERIC
7238@ifset W32
7239For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7240@end ifset
7241@ifset W16
7242For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7243@end ifset
7244@end ifclear
7245@ifset GENERIC
7246
7247The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7248depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7249@end ifset
7250
7251@c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7252@c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7253@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7254@cindex difference tables altered
7255@cindex altered difference tables
7256@quotation
7257@emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7258@end quotation
7259
7260@ifset GENERIC
7261Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7262addressing, require the following special treatment.  If the machine of
7263interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7264@pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7265
7266@end ifset
7267In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7268@command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7269Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7270compilers as part of jump tables.  Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7271directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7272@code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7273creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7274This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7275first byte after the secondary table.  This short-jump prevents the flow
7276of control from accidentally falling into the new table.  Inside the
7277table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}.  The original @samp{.word}
7278contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7279@code{sym2}.
7280
7281If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7282secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted.  If there was a
7283@samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7284long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7285and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7286minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7287entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7288
7289@ifset INTERNALS
7290@emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7291@samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7292assembly language programmers.
7293@end ifset
7294@end ifset
7295@c end     DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7296
7297@ifclear no-space-dir
7298@node Zero
7299@section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7300
7301@cindex @code{zero} directive
7302@cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7303This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes.  @var{size} must be an absolute
7304expression.  This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7305so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7306instead of zero.  Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7307@end ifclear
7308
7309@node Deprecated
7310@section Deprecated Directives
7311
7312@cindex deprecated directives
7313@cindex obsolescent directives
7314One day these directives won't work.
7315They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7316@table @t
7317@item .abort
7318@item .line
7319@end table
7320
7321@ifset ELF
7322@node Object Attributes
7323@chapter Object Attributes
7324@cindex object attributes
7325
7326@command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7327into object files for that architecture.  But not all object files are alike.
7328Many architectures support incompatible variations.  For instance, floating
7329point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7330requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7331passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7332hardware floating point unit.  Or, if two objects are built for different
7333generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7334newer generation at run-time.
7335
7336This information is useful during and after linking.  At link time,
7337@command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files.  After link
7338time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7339correctly.
7340
7341Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes.  Each
7342attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}.  The vendor is a
7343string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag.  The tag is an integer,
7344and indicates what property the attribute describes.  The value may be a string
7345or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object.  Missing
7346attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7347
7348Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7349The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7350
7351@menu
7352* GNU Object Attributes::               @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7353* Defining New Object Attributes::      Defining New Object Attributes
7354@end menu
7355
7356@node GNU Object Attributes
7357@section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7358
7359The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7360with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7361
7362Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7363its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7364an integer value if the tag number is even.  The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
73652} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7366architecture-dependent ones.
7367
7368@subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7369
7370These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7371
7372@table @r
7373@item Tag_compatibility (32)
7374The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name.  If
7375the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains.  If it is 1,
7376then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain.  If it is greater
7377than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7378arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7379@end table
7380
7381@subsection MIPS Attributes
7382
7383@table @r
7384@item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7385The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
7386
7387@itemize @bullet
7388@item
73890 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7390@item
73911 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7392double-precision FPU.
7393@item
73942 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7395@item
73963 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7397@item
73984 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7399floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7400number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7401@item
74025 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7403with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7404general-purpose registers.
7405@item
74066 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7407registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7408@item
74097 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7410registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7411direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7412@end itemize
7413@end table
7414
7415@subsection PowerPC Attributes
7416
7417@table @r
7418@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7419The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
7420
7421@itemize @bullet
7422@item
74230 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7424@item
74251 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7426@item
74272 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7428@item
74293 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7430@end itemize
7431
7432@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7433The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
7434
7435@itemize @bullet
7436@item
74370 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7438@item
74391 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7440@item
74412 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7442@item
74433 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7444@end itemize
7445@end table
7446
7447@subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7448
7449@table @r
7450@item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7451The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
7452
7453@itemize @bullet
7454@item
74550 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7456@item
74571 for files using software vector ABI.
7458@item
74592 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7460@end itemize
7461@end table
7462
7463@node Defining New Object Attributes
7464@section Defining New Object Attributes
7465
7466If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7467will need to modify.  New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7468mailing list.
7469
7470@itemize @bullet
7471@item
7472This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7473@item
7474The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7475@item
7476The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7477and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7478@item
7479Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7480@item
7481@file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7482@item
7483GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7484@end itemize
7485
7486@end ifset
7487
7488@ifset GENERIC
7489@node Machine Dependencies
7490@chapter Machine Dependent Features
7491
7492@cindex machine dependencies
7493The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7494each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs.  Floating point representations
7495vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7496directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7497assemblers on a particular platform.  Finally, some versions of
7498@command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7499optimization.
7500
7501This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7502include details on any machine's instruction set.  For details on that
7503subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7504
7505@menu
7506@ifset AARCH64
7507* AArch64-Dependent::		AArch64 Dependent Features
7508@end ifset
7509@ifset ALPHA
7510* Alpha-Dependent::		Alpha Dependent Features
7511@end ifset
7512@ifset ARC
7513* ARC-Dependent::               ARC Dependent Features
7514@end ifset
7515@ifset ARM
7516* ARM-Dependent::               ARM Dependent Features
7517@end ifset
7518@ifset AVR
7519* AVR-Dependent::               AVR Dependent Features
7520@end ifset
7521@ifset Blackfin
7522* Blackfin-Dependent::		Blackfin Dependent Features
7523@end ifset
7524@ifset CR16
7525* CR16-Dependent::              CR16 Dependent Features
7526@end ifset
7527@ifset CRIS
7528* CRIS-Dependent::              CRIS Dependent Features
7529@end ifset
7530@ifset D10V
7531* D10V-Dependent::              D10V Dependent Features
7532@end ifset
7533@ifset D30V
7534* D30V-Dependent::              D30V Dependent Features
7535@end ifset
7536@ifset EPIPHANY
7537* Epiphany-Dependent::          EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7538@end ifset
7539@ifset H8/300
7540* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7541@end ifset
7542@ifset HPPA
7543* HPPA-Dependent::              HPPA Dependent Features
7544@end ifset
7545@ifset I370
7546* ESA/390-Dependent::           IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7547@end ifset
7548@ifset I80386
7549* i386-Dependent::              Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7550@end ifset
7551@ifset I860
7552* i860-Dependent::              Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7553@end ifset
7554@ifset I960
7555* i960-Dependent::              Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7556@end ifset
7557@ifset IA64
7558* IA-64-Dependent::             Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7559@end ifset
7560@ifset IP2K
7561* IP2K-Dependent::              IP2K Dependent Features
7562@end ifset
7563@ifset LM32
7564* LM32-Dependent::              LM32 Dependent Features
7565@end ifset
7566@ifset M32C
7567* M32C-Dependent::              M32C Dependent Features
7568@end ifset
7569@ifset M32R
7570* M32R-Dependent::              M32R Dependent Features
7571@end ifset
7572@ifset M680X0
7573* M68K-Dependent::              M680x0 Dependent Features
7574@end ifset
7575@ifset M68HC11
7576* M68HC11-Dependent::           M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7577@end ifset
7578@ifset METAG
7579* Meta-Dependent ::             Meta Dependent Features
7580@end ifset
7581@ifset MICROBLAZE
7582* MicroBlaze-Dependent::	MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7583@end ifset
7584@ifset MIPS
7585* MIPS-Dependent::              MIPS Dependent Features
7586@end ifset
7587@ifset MMIX
7588* MMIX-Dependent::              MMIX Dependent Features
7589@end ifset
7590@ifset MSP430
7591* MSP430-Dependent::		MSP430 Dependent Features
7592@end ifset
7593@ifset NDS32
7594* NDS32-Dependent::             Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7595@end ifset
7596@ifset NIOSII
7597* NiosII-Dependent::            Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7598@end ifset
7599@ifset NS32K
7600* NS32K-Dependent::		NS32K Dependent Features
7601@end ifset
7602@ifset PDP11
7603* PDP-11-Dependent::            PDP-11 Dependent Features
7604@end ifset
7605@ifset PJ
7606* PJ-Dependent::                picoJava Dependent Features
7607@end ifset
7608@ifset PPC
7609* PPC-Dependent::               PowerPC Dependent Features
7610@end ifset
7611@ifset RL78
7612* RL78-Dependent::              RL78 Dependent Features
7613@end ifset
7614@ifset RISCV
7615* RISC-V-Dependent::            RISC-V Dependent Features
7616@end ifset
7617@ifset RX
7618* RX-Dependent::                RX Dependent Features
7619@end ifset
7620@ifset S390
7621* S/390-Dependent::             IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7622@end ifset
7623@ifset SCORE
7624* SCORE-Dependent::             SCORE Dependent Features
7625@end ifset
7626@ifset SH
7627* SH-Dependent::                Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7628* SH64-Dependent::              SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7629@end ifset
7630@ifset SPARC
7631* Sparc-Dependent::             SPARC Dependent Features
7632@end ifset
7633@ifset TIC54X
7634* TIC54X-Dependent::            TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7635@end ifset
7636@ifset TIC6X
7637* TIC6X-Dependent ::            TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7638@end ifset
7639@ifset TILEGX
7640* TILE-Gx-Dependent ::          Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7641@end ifset
7642@ifset TILEPRO
7643* TILEPro-Dependent ::          Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7644@end ifset
7645@ifset V850
7646* V850-Dependent::              V850 Dependent Features
7647@end ifset
7648@ifset VAX
7649* Vax-Dependent::               VAX Dependent Features
7650@end ifset
7651@ifset VISIUM
7652* Visium-Dependent::            Visium Dependent Features
7653@end ifset
7654@ifset XGATE
7655* XGATE-Dependent::             XGATE Features
7656@end ifset
7657@ifset XSTORMY16
7658* XSTORMY16-Dependent::         XStormy16 Dependent Features
7659@end ifset
7660@ifset XTENSA
7661* Xtensa-Dependent::            Xtensa Dependent Features
7662@end ifset
7663@ifset Z80
7664* Z80-Dependent::               Z80 Dependent Features
7665@end ifset
7666@ifset Z8000
7667* Z8000-Dependent::             Z8000 Dependent Features
7668@end ifset
7669@end menu
7670
7671@lowersections
7672@end ifset
7673
7674@c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7675@c in single-cpu versions.  This is mainly achieved by @lowersections.  There is a
7676@c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7677@c "Machine Dependencies".  Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7678@c major node below.  Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7679@c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7680@c in both conditional blocks.
7681
7682@ifset AARCH64
7683@include c-aarch64.texi
7684@end ifset
7685
7686@ifset ALPHA
7687@include c-alpha.texi
7688@end ifset
7689
7690@ifset ARC
7691@include c-arc.texi
7692@end ifset
7693
7694@ifset ARM
7695@include c-arm.texi
7696@end ifset
7697
7698@ifset AVR
7699@include c-avr.texi
7700@end ifset
7701
7702@ifset Blackfin
7703@include c-bfin.texi
7704@end ifset
7705
7706@ifset CR16
7707@include c-cr16.texi
7708@end ifset
7709
7710@ifset CRIS
7711@include c-cris.texi
7712@end ifset
7713
7714@ifset Renesas-all
7715@ifclear GENERIC
7716@node Machine Dependencies
7717@chapter Machine Dependent Features
7718
7719The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7720and there are also some syntax differences among the families.  This
7721chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7722family.
7723
7724@menu
7725* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7726* SH-Dependent::                Renesas SH Dependent Features
7727@end menu
7728@lowersections
7729@end ifclear
7730@end ifset
7731
7732@ifset D10V
7733@include c-d10v.texi
7734@end ifset
7735
7736@ifset D30V
7737@include c-d30v.texi
7738@end ifset
7739
7740@ifset EPIPHANY
7741@include c-epiphany.texi
7742@end ifset
7743
7744@ifset H8/300
7745@include c-h8300.texi
7746@end ifset
7747
7748@ifset HPPA
7749@include c-hppa.texi
7750@end ifset
7751
7752@ifset I370
7753@include c-i370.texi
7754@end ifset
7755
7756@ifset I80386
7757@include c-i386.texi
7758@end ifset
7759
7760@ifset I860
7761@include c-i860.texi
7762@end ifset
7763
7764@ifset I960
7765@include c-i960.texi
7766@end ifset
7767
7768@ifset IA64
7769@include c-ia64.texi
7770@end ifset
7771
7772@ifset IP2K
7773@include c-ip2k.texi
7774@end ifset
7775
7776@ifset LM32
7777@include c-lm32.texi
7778@end ifset
7779
7780@ifset M32C
7781@include c-m32c.texi
7782@end ifset
7783
7784@ifset M32R
7785@include c-m32r.texi
7786@end ifset
7787
7788@ifset M680X0
7789@include c-m68k.texi
7790@end ifset
7791
7792@ifset M68HC11
7793@include c-m68hc11.texi
7794@end ifset
7795
7796@ifset METAG
7797@include c-metag.texi
7798@end ifset
7799
7800@ifset MICROBLAZE
7801@include c-microblaze.texi
7802@end ifset
7803
7804@ifset MIPS
7805@include c-mips.texi
7806@end ifset
7807
7808@ifset MMIX
7809@include c-mmix.texi
7810@end ifset
7811
7812@ifset MSP430
7813@include c-msp430.texi
7814@end ifset
7815
7816@ifset NDS32
7817@include c-nds32.texi
7818@end ifset
7819
7820@ifset NIOSII
7821@include c-nios2.texi
7822@end ifset
7823
7824@ifset NS32K
7825@include c-ns32k.texi
7826@end ifset
7827
7828@ifset PDP11
7829@include c-pdp11.texi
7830@end ifset
7831
7832@ifset PJ
7833@include c-pj.texi
7834@end ifset
7835
7836@ifset PPC
7837@include c-ppc.texi
7838@end ifset
7839
7840@ifset RL78
7841@include c-rl78.texi
7842@end ifset
7843
7844@ifset RISCV
7845@include c-riscv.texi
7846@end ifset
7847
7848@ifset RX
7849@include c-rx.texi
7850@end ifset
7851
7852@ifset S390
7853@include c-s390.texi
7854@end ifset
7855
7856@ifset SCORE
7857@include c-score.texi
7858@end ifset
7859
7860@ifset SH
7861@include c-sh.texi
7862@include c-sh64.texi
7863@end ifset
7864
7865@ifset SPARC
7866@include c-sparc.texi
7867@end ifset
7868
7869@ifset TIC54X
7870@include c-tic54x.texi
7871@end ifset
7872
7873@ifset TIC6X
7874@include c-tic6x.texi
7875@end ifset
7876
7877@ifset TILEGX
7878@include c-tilegx.texi
7879@end ifset
7880
7881@ifset TILEPRO
7882@include c-tilepro.texi
7883@end ifset
7884
7885@ifset V850
7886@include c-v850.texi
7887@end ifset
7888
7889@ifset VAX
7890@include c-vax.texi
7891@end ifset
7892
7893@ifset VISIUM
7894@include c-visium.texi
7895@end ifset
7896
7897@ifset XGATE
7898@include c-xgate.texi
7899@end ifset
7900
7901@ifset XSTORMY16
7902@include c-xstormy16.texi
7903@end ifset
7904
7905@ifset XTENSA
7906@include c-xtensa.texi
7907@end ifset
7908
7909@ifset Z80
7910@include c-z80.texi
7911@end ifset
7912
7913@ifset Z8000
7914@include c-z8k.texi
7915@end ifset
7916
7917@ifset GENERIC
7918@c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7919@raisesections
7920@end ifset
7921
7922@node Reporting Bugs
7923@chapter Reporting Bugs
7924@cindex bugs in assembler
7925@cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7926
7927Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7928
7929Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7930not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7931entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7932Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7933
7934In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7935information that enables us to fix the bug.
7936
7937@menu
7938* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
7939* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
7940@end menu
7941
7942@node Bug Criteria
7943@section Have You Found a Bug?
7944@cindex bug criteria
7945
7946If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7947
7948@itemize @bullet
7949@cindex fatal signal
7950@cindex assembler crash
7951@cindex crash of assembler
7952@item
7953If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7954@command{@value{AS}} bug.  Reliable assemblers never crash.
7955
7956@cindex error on valid input
7957@item
7958If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7959
7960@cindex invalid input
7961@item
7962If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7963is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7964be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7965
7966@item
7967If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7968of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7969@end itemize
7970
7971@node Bug Reporting
7972@section How to Report Bugs
7973@cindex bug reports
7974@cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7975
7976A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.  If
7977you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7978contact that organization first.
7979
7980You can find contact information for many support companies and
7981individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7982distribution.
7983
7984@ifset BUGURL
7985In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7986to @value{BUGURL}.
7987@end ifset
7988
7989The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7990@strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
7991fact or leave it out, state it!
7992
7993Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7994and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might assume that the
7995name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.  Well, probably it does
7996not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7997happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7998perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7999the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and
8000give a specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8001and the most helpful.
8002
8003Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8004it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8005that the bug has not been reported previously.
8006
8007Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8008bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
8009respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8010You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8011
8012To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8013
8014@itemize @bullet
8015@item
8016The version of @command{@value{AS}}.  @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8017it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8018
8019Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8020the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8021
8022@item
8023Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8024
8025@item
8026The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8027version number.
8028
8029@item
8030What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8031``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8032
8033@item
8034The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8035observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8036all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8037
8038If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8039and then we might not encounter the bug.
8040
8041@item
8042A complete input file that will reproduce the bug.  If the bug is observed when
8043the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8044high level language source.  Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8045when run with the @samp{-S} option.  If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8046the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8047file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8048@command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8049
8050@item
8051A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8052incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8053
8054Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8055will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8056notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us a chance to
8057make a mistake.
8058
8059Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8060explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8061@command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8062library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash and ours
8063would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8064would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to
8065expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8066observations.
8067
8068@item
8069If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8070diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8071option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
8072discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8073by line number.
8074
8075The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8076sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8077@end itemize
8078
8079Here are some things that are not necessary:
8080
8081@itemize @bullet
8082@item
8083A description of the envelope of the bug.
8084
8085Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8086which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8087changes will not affect it.
8088
8089This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8090will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8091with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8092We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8093
8094Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8095of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
8096output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8097less time, and so on.
8098
8099However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8100report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8101
8102@item
8103A patch for the bug.
8104
8105A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
8106the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8107a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
8108to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8109
8110Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8111construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8112the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8113one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8114
8115And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8116patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
8117help us to understand.
8118
8119@item
8120A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8121
8122Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
8123things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8124@end itemize
8125
8126@node Acknowledgements
8127@chapter Acknowledgements
8128
8129If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8130it is not meant as a slight.  We just don't know about it.  Send mail to the
8131maintainer, and we'll correct the situation.  Currently
8132@c (October 2012),
8133the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8134
8135Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8136more details?}
8137
8138Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8139information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8140extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8141
8142K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8143many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8144up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8145testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8146including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8147and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8148support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8149port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8150file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8151assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8152
8153Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8154in format-specific I/O modules.
8155
8156The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan.  Eric Youngdale
8157has done much work with it since.
8158
8159The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8160
8161Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8162
8163The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8164University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8165
8166Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8167(@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8168(which hasn't been merged in yet).  Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8169support a.out format.
8170
8171Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8172tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8173Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support.  Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8174use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8175targets.
8176
8177John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8178simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives.  He
8179updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8180fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8181remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}).  John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8182cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8183required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8184
8185Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
818668k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8187added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8188PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8189
8190Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8191
8192Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8193
8194Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8195along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8196formats).  This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8197the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8198
8199Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8200Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8201Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8202Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8203and some initial 64-bit support).
8204
8205Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8206
8207Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8208support for openVMS/Alpha.
8209
8210Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8211flavors.
8212
8213David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8214Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8215
8216Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8217configuration enhancements.
8218
8219Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8220
8221Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements.  If
8222you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8223want to be, let us know.  Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8224intentionally leaving anyone out.
8225
8226@node GNU Free Documentation License
8227@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8228@include fdl.texi
8229
8230@node AS Index
8231@unnumbered AS Index
8232
8233@printindex cp
8234
8235@bye
8236@c Local Variables:
8237@c fill-column: 79
8238@c End:
8239